Home

Agilent Technologies Model A.08.xx Water Dispenser User Manual

1. Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The required SCPI instrument commands are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference E4411B or E4401B CAL SOUR STAT ON E4402 E4403B E4404BE 4405B 4407 or E4408B Prompt to connect AMPTD REF OUT to INPUT CAL SOUR STAT ON Query for the number of sweep points only applies to firmware revisions A 04 00 and later default is 401 SENS SWE POIN Sets the analyzer center frequency to 50 MHz SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ Sets the analyzer span to 50 MHz SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHZ Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete INIT IMM Specify units in dBm UNIT POW DBM Set the analyzer trace data to ASCII FORM DATA ASC Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete INIT IMM Query the trace data TRAC DATA TRACE1 Remove the from the ACSII data Save the trace data to an ASCII file Close the session 116 id vy ui wi wy vy v7 7 wy iA 7 i
2. 329 Case He uae bow reds ba asked cons 326 oo Tet PRESE FERSKEN eerie 319 PRESSEPEBRSISIUI ca ii e eL DH xp eb ibd ed b eei e 326 SYS Tem PRESet TYPE FACToryl USER Race RR obe rdg 325 SYS Ten PRESet TYPE PFACTOCZUSERIMODE 20 5 oss c06 ah 00 coe REGE cack backs EX EGER OUR RR RR E E 326 PRES USER SAVE aui iba Red ERA Repub ded ane ARE 327 SYSTem SPEaker STATe OFPIONIOIT rere C I RR ER m RA ERO 327 SEAIST ee ee dS Pa dtd ree 327 S25 lem TIME cmime esecomb EA AEREE 327 Oa DR ep sb o pod eq qoot egt qol deque bae DR o 327 cs Ton Qs eode dd ve PE X Edda RESP oie cepa hes A E FERE ER qd 327 sources lice ACES EAR RA ORE I oR ES REGERE ER A PEE idc 328 19 4408 329 destination trace source tracel source 2 gt 329 E 330 POINT Rer AR REQUE SES eei ORE ERE RIP RAE Rd 330 TITRACe MATH PEAK SORT AMP
3. 253 DISPla ANGLE eireta rinri ero Race GRE CH HERI IH ORA PLEO PESS 235 NULLE oL EET EE PU quitas PORSI REE ETO qe bee renee ee eed 233 DISPlay AN Notation CLOCI DATE FORMat MDYIDMY EAR ERR RE 235 DISPIay ANNotaitOIDCLOCEDATETORMAU ii ized Gees bias RH REA RES PIER RR dE ERE RET RATE 235 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCK STATe OFFIONIOH ee e I I en 235 DISP 235 DISPlay TITLe DATA ODER ERS 236 DisPlayANNotation DATA 236 dE EPI HC a 236 DISPlag MBENUSSTATe OPPIONIOLL 236 MENUS ncaa ated Max satay datas boe UR E dI Reate dE EE SAS 236 DISPlay WINDow ANNoOtauon ALL OPPIONIONT XR Rr Rr Ra RC 237 DISP WINDOW ANG an TALL ocx dou oe erue ERR ERROR heeds ded PERO dep Ed d 237 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe 2 2 00 BS 237 22 Commands Alphabetical Listing DISPS WINDow TRACe GRADCaleXxsRIDESTATe T ics ceeds Rn PR eR 237 237 IDISPIay WINDOW TRACe X SCALS IOBBPSSC Pede d es 237 I DISPlay WINDOW TRACs YDLINe sampi eirean one Ra a beet PEE 238 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe 2 0 IRR IIIA 238
4. 279 ESENSeEDEMod S bsectlofi iiie xo Re x ER RR eee dered EG REY ER 280 jh pgs MMC Et 280 Niro TCR 280 ENE EEEE E EA ee Se ee ee re ees 280 BDemnodulauon Control RO RR RE 281 Demod IME soi de TRO IER E ene OR OR AC REPTERI PORSI RET 281 Domod 281 SENSCEDETestor SubsecHolt 282 Automatic Detection Type Selected 282 DSCC kea 284 CE CO PA IHE OR EROR 285 EMI VOW 286 Range ee i 6 IURE 7I E TE RAEE Oei e a o 286 o TTE TTC 286 SENS FEMI Sue i ieee edn ee CaS SS qe 287 Auto Measure Average Un or OI cee ce 287 Auto Measure Peak On or Off 287 Auto Measure Quasi Peak Dn or 287 Selling the Dwell Time for Peak 288 Setting the Dwell Time Jor Quasi Peak 288 Setting the Dwell Time fot Average Peak onic Hs ceed bd eee AE RA CORREA RE ruk 288 Contents Preselector Centering On or Off E7403A E7404A E7405A only 288 meting the Dwell Tune for Range 289 Auto Measure Marsin Onor LIT 289 Subsectio deeea heeds ade 290 ARCEM 290 Center Step SIZE FMS
5. Bit Decimal Description Value 0 1 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 1 2 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 POWer Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Power Status Register 4 16 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 2 32 FREQuency Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Frequency Status Register 6 64 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 78 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 8 256 CALibration Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Calibration Status Register 9 512 INTegrity Sum This is the summary bit for the Questionable Integrity Status Register 10 1024 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 11 2048 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 12 4096 Reserved T
6. 86 Questionable Status Calibration Condition and Event Enable Registers 87 Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and Event Enable Registers 88 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity Register iacesalsesssukathnttetus re Rn 89 Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers 91 3 Programming Examples List oi edn beeen Sede SG DRE eed EVI WR ebd ed 94 Programming Examples System Requirements 0 0000000 00 95 C Programming Examples nune VIL os cc ueuesechvestrid veX rad pu 96 Typical Example Program Contents 96 EG 97 Compiling and Linking a VTL 97 Bxumple POOP 99 VISA 650065 ii tyd 99 Opening Rest bik pad EN 100 looo E E E E E E E E E E TE 100 Addressing cc cha heads 102 66525692 054550oeG9554 050545h090 04555496 103 Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion ie AREE 104 BAM abes eBesearidEskbbeseeqaeeR b i AQERE CERA E AER PERSE 104 Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search 108 Performing Internal Self alignment eus Ed a AREA RE 112 Readi
7. RR em Y Rex ods 334 T Ritsger EX Tama EK RERO E RO E RACER CR ER ERR RE EUER A RR nn 334 ATRIGger SEQuence OFFPSet 64 bit floating point value ht Rer RR Hee Vd ER es 245 TT Risser SEQu ence OPPB2t uos vesc 335 TRIGger SEQuence SOURce IMMediatel VIDeolILINEIEXTernal 1 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 336 SOURCE ais eee ke bee ERE CERRO Y ree ed Pe Re REPRE eS SE RP Se REE ES 336 I RIGSer SEQuence VIDeo LE Vel bee ewe donee ge eC eee RR RET EE ER TE 336 TRUE TEE ESEQBence V eo L Evel PREQUGNCY kd as ko doe roe HIR edP 337 ITRIOSG SEQuence VIDeo LEVeEFREQuUERCV oii 60554405559 65560444 OPENS 337 seed kde Ru er ORI eee 336 JUNIT POWer DBMIDBMVIDBU VIDBUAIVIWIA RR RR REG n RR REC Rn 338 338 LESE asd di dr ER OC HORA CUI Rb duce Ra bie Md edid d e dede 269 SENSSEAYBRagpec COUN AMENE 269 SENSE AVERI S COUNT Re Rd qudd 269 SENSeT AVERage TYPE 211 SENSeEAVERage TYPE AUTO OPPIONIQOUI iii sek E REA PEE RR RR YR dH os 270 AVER ge T YPECAUTOT Rope ap Pee 270 PSENSe AVERE TYPE eee paced a Hp eR PIG RO Re re er PRA Un ai
8. Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental frequency viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 1 MHZ n dFundamental Set the analyzer to 10MHz Span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10 MHZ n Put the analyzer in a single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 n Trigger a sweep wait for sweep completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI n Perform a peak search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Place the signal at the reference level using the marker to reference level command and take sweep Chapter 3 173 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 viPrintf viESA CALC MARK SET RLEV n Trigger a sweep wait for sweep completion viPrintf viESA INIT WAI n Perform a peak search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Increase timeout to 60 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 60000 Perform activate signal track viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON n Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep Perform narrow span and wait viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10e4 n Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep De activate the signal track viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT OFF n Reset timeout to 3 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI_ATTR_TMO_ VALUE 3000 Set units to dBm viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Per
9. SENSe DETector FUNCtion Specifies the detection mode For each trace interval bucket average detection displays the average of all the samples within the interval The averaging can be done using two methods the power method RMS the video method Y Axis Units The method is controlled by the BW Avg Avg Type key The combination of the average detector and the power average type is equivalent to what is sometimes referred to as RMS detection Negative peak detection displays the lowest sample taken during the interval being displayed Positive peak detection displays the highest sample taken during the interval being displayed Sample detection displays the sample taken during the interval being displayed and is used primarily to display noise or noise like signals In sample mode the instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed into memory This detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude measurement of non noise like signals Average detection is used when measuring the average value of the amplitude across each trace interval bucket The averaging method used by the average detector is set to either video or power as appropriate when the average type is auto coupled Factory Preset and RST Positive History Added Average and RMS elements to the command with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod Detector Det Demod Detector Pea
10. No No Is Trace Average or Noise Marker Ratio 10 or Band Power On 5 Detector Sample Is Avg Type Power Yes No Is Avg Type Power Yes Ratio 10 cl710a 274 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Resolution Bandwidth Type SENSe BANDwidth TYPE IMPulse DB6 DB3 SENSe BANDwidth TYPE Selects the type of 1 MHz resolution bandwidth RBW used FCC regulations specify a 6 dB 1 MHz resolution bandwidth for measurements greater than 1 GHz CISPR regulations 1999 specify a 1 MHz impulse resolution bandwidth Spectrum analyzers use a 3 dB resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST IMPulse Front Panel Access BW Avg 1 MHz BW Type Chapter 5 275 Language Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection SENSe CORRection Subsection Delete All Corrections SENSe CORRection CSET ALL DELete This command deletes all existing corrections History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Delete All Corrections Perform Amplitude Correction SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe Turns On or Off the amplitude corrections When turned On only the correction sets that were turned on are enabled When turned Off all of the correction sets are disabled Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks To turn On or Off an individua
11. E RE SEL ROR EEREGRE REALE Re SEER AGEN edd dd 280 SENSE DEMod DIegeto aiias sudor RR DEEDES CELE 280 SENSGEDEMORESTATe OPFIONW eee RIO ES RoR EER 281 SENSE DEN STALE rie XT eee advenas 281 TINE SUMS acid deb cd RT b oe e EUER ROTE PSOE CUR XE PE 281 LSENSEEDENISETIBET 281 IRON 280 AUTO OFFIONIO Gp EEG RO E ORG EG RR E RENTA ENG GU RYE e Keak 282 SENSE 282 SENSE PDE lect RANGE IM Medite s SAA GERE REC RN duse 6 JR 4004 qo o pot RE ao OR 286 LU SENSSEDEIDsctot RANGeIMMedi t i nii ze pu CERES CREER EE e RRS 286 SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGativelPOSitivelSAMPIelAVERagelRMS 284 SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI QPEaklAVERagelOFF eeeeeeeeeee A 285 SENSE DE Testor FUNCH EMI HERR RHERT GS REQUEPRRERATM RR RNURERRNUPRRNES 285 SENSO bud OE CR Bre bap ed Ep a bp bad 284 SENSe DETector FUNCtionJEMI VIEW POSitivelEMI ccc ee eens 286 SEN Se EMI VIEW 286 PSENS DE fector 286 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector AVERage DWELI lt time gt 0 0c cece ee nnn 288 SENSe EMEMEASure DETector AVERage DWBLI occ cic cae RE SA scenes 288 SENSeE EMEMEASure DETecto AVBRage 22204 ccked ceed SERED ERE iik
12. dens qoaa 290 Center Eequebboy Siep SB 291 ar 291 Full Frequency Sp n ew eee Sade Rd pid 292 Law FI SD d dadas qune e dE Re HER OUR ER d Ehe REA PUR FER dS 292 eee eee ee 292 SINT PPRLUBDON 293 Feguency Sve NIBUS oua Died prios pecia equi 295 Frequency Synthesis NUS 294 Subsection 540 e Rh So be ed Ro X eed ee Se EORR E eae 295 Enahle Disable QPD X IO Gail bow ns ends oe ks 295 ANSO r 295 Dura Post AMEE ABIDE Locos DECOR SU hee Mo EE LE RERO EE Ere 295 luput Pot Power Gait seceetsce AS 296 Input Port Maximum Winer POWEr ois Hees ou dons ds ends 296 Optimize Presel ctor Prequency cena dawethasn duane 296 297 298 Sweep POU CPP IPM bhods oe eG050566 abodes 4480250204 298 set Pieguesney Domain Scale TER hooks i eae een CERE RA 298 TIME 299 Aumale Sweep TIE 299 Sweep Mod 300 Time Gating Delay Option 1D6 300 Tice Gate Length Upton 1D Only x 300 Time Gate Level Up
13. des A CSENSE CORREO 276 SET ALLESTATe OPHONIOI Gc hh 276 276 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 I213l4 DATA lt freq gt lt rel_ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel_ampI gt 2776 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 I2314 DATA MERGe freq rel ampl freq rel ampl 277 SENSeECORRectio CSET 1 I2IBMEDATAT 276 SENSeECORRecaomt CSET IZB DELE Ies ERR CERRO ROGER GU RC RES 278 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 I2I314 X SPACing LINearlLOGarithmic 00 00 eee ee eee 278 D SENSeErCORRsct onm C SET 1 2ISI4 SEXTe OPPIONIOIT ER RERO x RD REIR 278 CSBT TIDISMDSTATS Z oaks sax ak guck an XR CR CROE CR CB OR ECICR RS ROI aR 278 SENSe CORRection MPedance INPut MAGNitude lt gt ee eee 279 SENSe CORRection IMPedance INPut MAGNitude 2 0 0 0 0c eee eee nee 279 31 Commands Alphabetical Listing COR Recthion MAGNitUdel ROO ADEM EASES OR RR RR 279 SENSeECORRection OPBSet M AGNitude Re d EUER DEERE 279 SENSE DEMOT AMIPM ausu PERS ER EI dd E d EE 280 D SENSeSEDEMOd FMIDeyvitatt n ceo Ronan RU E SE 280 3ENSEEDENMIQEPMDOGAOMION
14. 76 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Power Condition Register are given in the following table Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 R P P Tripped A lin this bit position indicates that the reverse power protection is tripped Agilent model E7401A only Reverse power protection is overload protection for the tracking generator 1 2 Source Unleveled A in this bit position indicates that the source tracking generator output is unleveled 2 4 Source LO Unleveled A 1 in this bit position indicates that the local oscillator LO in the source tracking generator is unleveled 3 8 LO Unleveled A lin this bit position indicates that the analyzer local oscillator LO is unleveled 4 16 50 MHz Osc Unleveled A lin this bit position indicates that the 50 MHz amplitude reference signal is unleveled 5 32 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 6 64 Input Overload Tripped A 1 this bit position indicates that the input overload protection is tripped Agilent EMC model E7401A only 7 128 Unused This bit is always set to 0 8 256 LO Out Unleveled A 1 in this bit position indicates that the first local oscillator LO output is unleveled 9 512 Unused This bit is always set to 0 10 1024
15. SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution and installed options Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access BW Avg Video BW Auto Man Video Bandwidth Automatic SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo AUTO Couples the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access BW Avg Video BW Auto Man Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio lt number gt SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio Specifies the ratio of the video bandwidth to the resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST 3 0 Range 0 00001 to 3 0e6 Front Panel Access BW Avg VBW RBW Ratio Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO Selects auto or manual mode for video bandwidth to resolution bandwidth ratio Chapter 5 273 Language Reference SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Refer to Figure 5 3 which is a flowchart that illustrates VBW and RBW Ratio auto rules Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access BW Avg VBW RBW Auto Man Figure 5 3 VBW and RBW Ratio Auto Rules VBW RBW Ratio Auto Rules Is RBW EMI Yes No Is Detector Peak or Negative Peak Is Trace Average On Yes Marker or Band Yes Ratio 10
16. Condition Register 45 44 13 12 4 10 9876543210 QUEStionable Y Y V Y Y V Y VY Y Y Y Y VY caer 18 34 19 12 14 1009 8 7 6 5 4 32 1 0 QUEStionable Status Y i Y i i i i Y Y i i Y i Y Negative Fiter 15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210 QUEStionable Status Event Register 45 44 13 12 11 10 9876543210 ck759a 75 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable POWer Register Figure 2 10 Questionable Status Power Register Diagram R PP Tripped Source Unleveled Source LO Unleveled LO Unleveled 50 MHz Osc Unleveled Reserved Input Overload Tripped Unused LO Out Unleveled Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Always Zero 0 QUEStionable Status P OWer Condition Register 15 14 13 12 11 109 87 65 4 32 1 O0 QUEStionable Status y Y Y Y Y 3 Y VY YY Y Y Y Power 15 14 13 12 11 009876543 21 0 Transition Fil Questionable staus VV X X Y Y Y X Y Y Y Y y Y v3 Neuve 15 14 13 12 10 9 87 654 3 21 0 Transition Filter o y v V Y vv vv vv v v v v QUEStionable Status POWer 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 32 1 0 Event Register o LZ uO 77 22 222 1 8 2 _ L L 1 1 j Y auestionaviesiaus 1 CT POWer Event 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 87 654 32 1 0 Enable Register To Questionable Status Register Bit 3
17. Factory Preset and RST 1 us Range 0 3 us to 429 seconds Default Unit seconds External Trigger Line Trigger Delay Enable TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe OFF ON 0 1 TRIGger SEQuence DELay STATe This command allows you to turn on or off a delay during which the analyzer will wait to begin a sweep after receiving an external trigger signal or a line trigger Factory Preset and RST Off Default Unit seconds Remarks Free run activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep This function is not available when Gate is on Front Panel Access Trig Trig Delay On Off External Trigger Slope TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe This command activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when the external voltage connected to GATE TRIG EXT TRIG IN on the rear panel passes through approximately 1 5 volts The external trigger signal must be a 0 V to 5 V TTL signal This function only controls the trigger polarity for positive or negative going signals 334 Chapter5 Language Reference TRIGger Subsystem Factory Preset and RST Positive Front Panel Access Trig External Pos Neg Trigger Offset TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet 64 bit floating point value TRIGger SEQuence OFFSet This command sets the trigger offset Factory Preset and R
18. RERO IKE EE Oh c Pee qo 237 Display Line Amplitude n E Peace E PE deg 238 DIUI LID Eae dme bed ede d ORE AT OR HERI rb 238 IF Gain Aut Reference Level Auto Ranging 238 Normalized Reference Leyel 1222x622 so ob X TE TVERES EE IAEA ES 239 Normalized Reference Level POSIDOU 24 de quc pesi bee vene pde 239 Trace Y Axis Amplitude Scale 240 Tace Y Axis Fregueney Scaling eR EREREE REPE RR ened abe E 240 Trace Y Axis Reference Level 244523 2244344 AWWERHET A AR Rd EAR ER d ag 240 sue dade Sir Ebr ideo SE 241 bic Fo po lg ETT MUT 242 SUDORE 243 AMNEM REFS 243 Numeric Data TOU 243 D Rag s v o eC ON ER OOOH SOR 245 PU 245 Pamer Type 245 eee eee ER AA 245 PM se ee eee a ee ee ee eee eee re Sere NP bd E 245 select a Signal List to Include in a Repott 24 lt seascedsieseeereieecdsdetecsas 246 Select a Signal List to Include in a Report Delta 246 Cn c i6 c A p rn 246 043 Oe rV 247 Form keep P S rr trr RARE SAM 247 pd opaca dd d xs 247 Number of Items Pri
19. ViStatus viStatus 0 int iNum 0 int iNoOfPoints 0 long 1Count 0 long 1Freq 0L long lAmpltd 1 static ViChar cToken 146 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Entering Amplitude Correction Data No of amplitude corrections points iNoOfPoints 4 Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp viESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Amplitude Correction Program n n Set the stop frequency to 1 5 GHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ STOP 1 5 GHz n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Purge any currently loaded amplitude correction factors viPrintf viESA SENS CORR CSET1 DEL Mn Enter amp cor frequency amplitude pairs 0 Hz 0 dB 100 MHz 5 dB 1 GHz 5 dB 1 5GHz 10 viPrintf viESA SENS CORR CSET1 DATA viPrintf viESA 0 0 0 viPrintf viESA 100 E6 5 0 viPrintf viESA 1 E9 5 0 viPrintf viESA 1 5E9 10 Activate amplitude correction Notice that the noise floor slopes up from 0 Hz to 100 MHz then downward by 10 dB to 1 GHz then upwards again by 15 dB to 1 5 GHz viPrintf
20. n t Limit Line2 Failed n else printf n t Limit Test Pass n void main Program Variable ViStatus viStatus 0 long lOpc 0L Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI_NULL VI_NULL amp ViESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Limit Lines 137 Programming Examples Using Limit Lines Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Display the program heading printf n t t Limit Lines Program n n Set the Y Axis Units to dBm viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Set to Frequency Domain Mode viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE1 CONT DOM FREQ n Delete any current limit line and define the upper limit line to have the following frequency amplitude pairs viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE1 TYPE UPP n Turn on display viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE1 DISP ON n Send the upper limit line data viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE1 DATA 40E06 50 1 45E06 20 1 50 06 15 1 55E06 20 1 60E06 50 1Mn Turn on display viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE1 DISP ON n Delete any current limit li
21. viClose defaultRM 144 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Entering Amplitude Correction Data Entering Amplitude Correction Data J CK RR I RI II III III IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IO III IO ICAO ICAO k kkk eek Entering Amplitude Correction Data This example is for the 44 ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Sets the stop frequency to 1 5 GHz SENS FREQ STOP 1 5 GHZ Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON i f ay 7 id i ay oy v 7 ay ud Enter amplitude correction frequency amplitude pairs 1 5 GHz 10 dB 0 Hz 0 dB 100 MHz 5 dB 1 GHz 5 dB SENS CORR CSET1 DATA 0 0 100E6 5 0 1 0E9 5 0 Activate amplitude correction SENS CORR CSET1 DATA SENS CORR CSET1 ALL STAT ON f i ui ay Query the analyzer for the amplitude corection factors SENS CORR CSET1 DATA Store them in an array Display the array Close the session f RR RI RR I e He e II II IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IO I IO I IO ICAO ICAO k k kk eek f include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt mat
22. 1151 lr 259 MARS 258 ER ete ee reek be ei pb S det bh dite 260 MMEM COPY hie wamels Amie X TEX Y URESOPXS d 260 WMMEMory DATA nls names edennite length blacks 261 MTS Sus ss qaad RETI RRESRFxGR ERR EN Uer Race re DE EORR RR eed be RP IRR pd dedo 261 SMINTEM Gp DELete venie NAMES een cee Heed EN E ARR EREMO E dri de e Rd E 261 MMEMory LOAD CORRection ANTennalCABLelOTHerlUSER file name 261 MMEMory LOAD LIMit LLINEMLLINE file name gt 5 0 44 ccs5 60055 n Rx RES 261 tile vates uus cin hE AERIS RES EMASA GARE DORE R REE RRR DE RE Ron CR 263 SMMBNIGDSLOADISTATe L Dle MAMES Lia ice aber eee hk 262 MMEMory LOAD TRACe nile Names serri ccna dock diete AOI aei eoe o ee a ERROR IE 262 MMEMoP MDIRSctory edu pullis OEP I HCRRA Ces Rd ESTER EERE SEES 263 MMEMor BDIBsctory dir CERES reed 264 MMEMory STORe CORRection 08 lt 1 _ 264 MMEM t VS TORE LIvit LLINEILLINE lle Lud RUE eee bs BEER CER RR cec 265 MMEMory S TOR amp anes iuc ici br I dE i CAS ES dei P dnd 265 URGE l
23. 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT princi Press Return to continue scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main Chapter 3 121 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB Program Variables ViStatus viStatus 0 ViChar VI FAR cResult 5000 0 ViReal32 dTraceArray 401 0 char cBufferInfo 6 0 long lNumberBytes 0L long 10 0L unsigned long lRetCount OL int iSize 0 BytesPerPoint is 4 for Real32 or Int32 formats 8 for Real64 and 2 for Uint16 int iBytesPerPnt 4 int iSwpPnts 401 int iDataBytes 1604 int iHeaderBytes 6 FILE fTraceFile Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIB0 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp viESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument This will set number of sweep points to default of 401 viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Read in Trace Data using 32 bit Real Format using GPIB n n Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference Route50MHzSignal Query number of sweep points p
24. 546 315 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable 315 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query 316 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition 316 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive 316 Negative TTRBSIBON eade ba i aoi ats de dioe de 317 Questionable Power Conc hill sebo e XO eoo RES e ide EES 317 Cuesponable Power Enable 13 445 4504 4454069554494 6449495409 594454 KA RI EK 317 Questionable Power Event QUEry dg 317 Questionable Power Negative Transition 318 Questionable Power Positive Transition 318 Contents Juestonable Positive Transition oe eRe CR ard CA 318 aisudxs axe ead a P dd eig 319 GPIB BOUE uiis oc ea e ae c ae oe e o do e E Rd b de E e ward 319 peril Pod DTR DOWD 319 poral Foc RTS Sell 320 senal Port 320 Pace senal Port Trait PROS Sey 321 Hardware Configuration Query oiacoea xen stseEd4as Ras RN Ada d 321 Display the Hardware ER Y RR ER 321 System C ect iis 322 Display System Configuration 6 46455 54 56es 66450 gs 05945504064 R508 0958588 322
25. Factory Preset and RST Immediate free run triggering Remarks Free run activates the trigger condition that allows the next Sweep to start as soon as possible after the last sweep Front Panel Access Trig Free Run Trig Video Trig Line Trig External Pos Neg Trigger Delay is not available in Free Run so turning Free Run on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay Video Trigger Level Amplitude TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel ampl TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel1 Specifies the level at which a video trigger will occur Factory Preset and RST 2 5 divisions below reference level Range 10 display divisions below reference level to reference level Default Unit current amplitude units Remarks Video is adjusted using this command but must also be selected using the command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce VIDeo When in FM Demod and Demod View is on the Video Trigger level is adjusted queried using the command TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency freq Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode so turning Video on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay 336 Chapter 5 NOTE Language Reference TRIGger Subsystem Front Panel Access Trig Video Video Trigger Level Frequency TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency lt freq gt TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel FREQuency This com
26. SENSe POWer RF PCENter This command centers the preselector filter at the signal of interest This command has no effect if it is activated in non preselected bands This command is usable from 3 GHz to the maximum frequency of the analyzer This command is available only on Agilent EMC models E7403A E7404A and E7405A This command has no effect with markers set to less than 3 GHz Remarks A peak search will be done if no marker is on Front Panel Access AMPLITUDEY Y Scale Presel Center Chapter 5 297 Language Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection SENSe SWEep Subsection Sweep Points SENSe SWEep POINts number of points gt SENSe SWEep POINts This command sets the number of sweep points Factory Preset and RST 401 Example SWEep POIN 401 History This command is available only on analyzers with firmware revision A 04 00 and later Analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A 04 00 have the number of sweep points fixed at 401 Range 101 to 8192 2 to 8192 in zero span for analyzers with firmware revision A 05 00 and later Remarks For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A 08 00 any change to sweep points sets the following commands as shown CALCulate LLINel DISPlay to off and CALCulate LLINe2 DISPlay to off Whenever the number of sweep points change the following functions are affected All trace data is erased Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode Sw
27. The instrument can automatically couple instrument settings together for accurate measurements and optimum dynamic range This command is used to override the coupling for special measurement needs COUPle NONE puts these functions into the manually set not coupled mode COUPle ALL puts the functions into the auto coupled mode and also puts the sweep coupling mode into SA couple all The following list of analyzer functions can be automatically coupled Resolution bandwidth Center Frequency Average type Firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Marker functions Detector Firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Marker functions Average On Off Average type Attenuation Reference level External amplifier gain Preamp Center frequency step Span in swept spans Resolution bandwidth in zero spans Video bandwidth Resolution bandwidth Tracking Generator Sweep coupling mode SR SA VBW RBW ratio Firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Sweep time Span Video bandwidth Resolution bandwidth Chapter 5 233 NOTE Language Reference COUPle Subsystem Sweep points Phase noise optimization Phase Noise Optimization Firmware revision A 08 00 or greater Span Although marker count gate time and marker trace have auto settings they are not affected by Couple Factory Preset and RST All Front Panel Access Auto Couple Auto All 234 Chapter5 Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem DISPlay Subsyst
28. The string positions are defined in Table 5 1 Note that while the ADD format requires only a frequency and allows defaults the data returned by the FETCH will always return a fully formatted data string See the field descriptions for allowed values and formats Chapter 5 201 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection The ADD command always appends signals to the end of the signal list If the Table 5 1 Field Description Table Position ADD ADD Definition Default Required Optional 1 Yes Frequency Value required 2 Yes Peak Ampl 0 Peak detector flag off 3 Yes QPK Ampl 0 Quasi Peak detector flag off 4 Yes Avg Ampl 0 Average amplitude flag off 5 Yes Uncertainty 0 Applied when measured 6 Yes Total 0 Applied when measured Correction 7 Yes Marked Status 0 off 8 Yes Peak Det Flag 0 off Implicitly On if peak amplitude provided 9 Yes QPK Det Flag 0 off Implicitly On if QPk amplitude provided 10 Yes Avg Flag 0 off Implicitly On if Avg amplitude provided 11 Yes Comment Empty ADD command fails e g signal list at capacity a message is placed on the status line and in the error queue An invalid data format places a message on the status line and into the error queue Because all of the values may not be meaningful during the ADD process the ADD command allows defaults to be used Because of this the data string submitted may be abbreviated Each ADD data format
29. 0 printf t nWaiting for an SRQ to be generated for l1Count 20 lCount 10 amp amp iSrqOccurred 0 1Count long 1Count2 0 printf while 1Count2 lt 100 amp amp iSrqOccurred ll YIELD 156 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Determine if an Error has Occurred printf Nn Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4411B strlen hpESA E4411B strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models EA4401B 4411 and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn printf i Press Return to continue Mn scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn Interrupt handler trigger event handler Vistatus VI FUNCH sSrqHdlr ViSession viESA ViEventType eventType ViEvent ctx ViAddr userHdlr ViUInt16 iStatusByte 0 long 1Cond OL Make sure it is an SRQ event igno
30. 11013001600112001240014800196001192001384001 576001115200 Front Panel Access System Remote Port 320 Chapter5 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem Serial Port Receive Pace Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive PACE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive PACE Set the receive pace to on or none for an instrument with the RS 232 interface installed Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument If no optional serial port number is specified port 1 is assumed Factory Preset no RST The factory default is none This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Serial Port Transmit Pace Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE Set the transmit pace to on or none for an instrument with the RS 232 interface installed Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument If no optional serial port number is specified port 1 is assumed Factory Preset no RST The factory default is none This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Hardware Configuration Query SYSTem CONFigure HARDware Returns string of information about the current hardware in the instrument Front Panel Access System Show Hardware Display the Hardware Configuration
31. 2 Select Trace Display Mode TRACe1 2 3 MODE WRITe MAXHold MINHold VIEW BLANk TRACe1 2 3 MODE Selects the display mode for the selected trace Write puts the trace in the normal mode updating the data Maximum hold displays the highest measured trace value for all the data that has been measured since the function was turned on Minimum hold displays the lowest measured trace value for all the data that has been measured since the function was turned on View turns on the trace data so that it can be viewed on the display Blank turns off the trace data so that it is not viewed on the display Remarks Whenever the number of sweep points change the following functions are affected e All trace data is erased Any traces in view mode will go to blank mode Front Panel Access View Trace Clear Write View Trace Max Hold View Trace Min Hold View Trace View View Trace Blank View Trace Normalize Ref Trace View Blank Chapter 5 333 Language Reference TRIGger Subsystem TRIGger Subsystem The TRIGger subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with triggering the data acquisitions Other trigger related commands are found in the INITiate and ABORt subsystems External Trigger Line Trigger Delay Value TRIGger SEQuence DELay delay TRIGger SEQuence DELay This command sets the amount of trigger delay when using the rear panel external trigger input or the line trigger
32. C VXIPNP WIN LIB BC VISA LIB for Borland compilers See the following section for information on how to use the VTL run time libraries Compiling and Linking a VTL Program 32 bit Applications assumes Windows 95 operating system The following is a summary of important compiler specific considerations for several C C compiler products when developing WIN32 applications For Microsoft Visual C version 2 0 compilers Select Project Update All Dependencies from the menu Select Project Settings from the menu Click on the C C button Select Code Generation from the Use Run Time Libraries list box VTL requires these definitions for WIN32 Click on OK to close the dialog boxes Chapter 3 97 Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL Select Project Settings from the menu Click on the Link button and add visa32 libtothe Object Library Modules list box Optionally you may add the library directly to your project file Click on OK to close the dialog boxes You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths They are set by doing the following 1 Select Tools Options from the menu Click on the Directories button to set the include file path Select Include Files fromthe Show Directories For list box Bop m Click on the Add button and type in the following NVXIPNPNWIN95NINCLUDE CA Select Library Files fromthe Show Directories For list box 6 Click on the Add bu
33. ESE number ESE Sets the bits in the standard event status enable register This register monitors I O errors and synchronization conditions such as operation complete request control query error device dependent error execution error command error and power on A summary bit is generated on execution of the command Chapter 5 193 NOTE Language Reference IEEE Common Commands Query returns the state of the standard event status enable register Range Integer 0 to 255 Standard Event Status Register Query ESR Queries and clears the standard event status event register This is a destructive read Range Integer 0 to 255 Identification Query IDN Returns an instrument identification information string The string will contain the model number serial number and firmware revision The response is organized into four fields separated by commas The field definitions are as follows Manufacturer Model Serial number Firmware version Example Hewlett Packard E7402A US39120213 A 06 00 As shown in the example the analyzer returns Hewlett Packard as the manufacturer even though it is now manufactured by Agilent Technologies This is intentional Agilent Technologies was created out of the Hewlett Packard company and the Hewlett Packard name is retained to support those customers who have purchased EMC analyzers in the past Front Panel Access System Show System Instrument State Query L
34. Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Gate On Off Time Gate Trigger Type Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE TYPE LEVel EDGE SENSe SWEep TIME GATE TYPE Selects between edge and level mode for time gated spectrum analysis Level triggers the gate when the signal surpasses a specific level set to either low or high Edge triggers the gate when the edge of a signal is encountered set to either a negative going edge or a positive going edge Factory Preset and RST Edge Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Gate Control Edge Level 302 Chapter5 CAUTION Language Reference SOURce Subsystem SOURce Subsystem SOURce subsystem controls the signal characteristics of the tracking generator Refer also to the OUTPut Subsystem on page 267 which contains a command that controls the tracking generator output Sets the Output Power Offset Correction SOURce CORRection OFFSet rel 1 gt SOURCe CORRection OFFSet Specifies an offset for the displayed output power level An offset power level can be added to the displayed level to compensate for system losses for example cable loss or gains for example preamplifier gain This offset does not change the power out of the source it only changes the display so that it reads out the actual power delivered to the device under test Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 327 6 dB to 327 6 dB Default Unit Curr
35. Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel CF Step Man Frequency Span SENSe FREQuency SPAN freq SENSe FREQuency SPAN Set the frequency span Setting the span to 0 Hz puts the analyzer into zero span Factory Preset and RST 800 MHz Range E7401A 0 Hz 100 Hz to 1 58 GHz EMC E7402A 0 Hz 100 Hz to 3 10 GHz EMC E7403A 0 Hz 100 Hz to 6 78 GHz EMC E7404A 0 Hz 100 Hz to 13 3 GHz EMC E7405A 0 Hz 100 Hz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access SPAN X Scale Span SPAN X Scale Zero Span Chapter 5 291 NOTE Language Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection Full Frequency Span SENSe FREQuency SPAN FULL Set the frequency span to full scale Factory Preset and RST 800 MHz Front Panel Access SPAN X Scale Full Span Last Frequency Span SENSe FREQuency SPAN PREVious Set the frequency span to the previous span setting Front Panel Access SPAN X Scale Last Span Start Frequency SENSe FREQuency STARt freq SENSe FREQuency STARt Set the start frequency In log sweep mode the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz Factory Preset and RST 200 MHz Range EMC E7401A 80 MHz to 1 58 GHz EMC E7402A 80 MHz to 3 10 GHz EMC E7403A 80 MHz to 6 78 GHz EMC E7404A 80 MHz to 13 3 GHz EMC E7405A 80 MHz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Start Freq 1 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode 2
36. INPut 0UTPut STATus QUEStionable SENSe SENSe SENSe SENSe SENSe SENSe SENSe UNIT AVERage BANDwidth CORRection DEMod DETector POWer SWEep INTERNAL ATTENUATION and SOURCE OUTPut SENSe POWer SOURCe LIMIT LINES CALCulate LLINe MMEMory TRACe MARKER CALCulate MARKer MEASURE EMI INITiate MEASure SENSe AVERage SENSe POWer SENSe SWEep PRESET RST STATus SYSTem PRINTING HCOPy SIGNAL LIST CALCulate MEASure SOURCE see function category Internal Attenuation and Source SPAN see also functional category FREQUENCY SPAN SPEAKER SYSTem SWEEP SENSe SWEep SOURCe SYNCHRONIZATION OPC WAI SYSTem Chapter 4 187 Programming Command Cross References Functional Index to SCPI Subsection Function Category SCPI Subsection or Subsystem SYSTEM INFORMATION CLS ESE number IDN ESR LRN STATus STATus QUEStionable SYSTem TRACE DISPlay FORMat SENSe EBWidth TRACe TRACE MATH CALCulate NTData DISPlay TRACe TRIGGER TRG ABORt INITiate TRIGger 188 Chapter 4 Language Reference This chapter contains SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments programming commands for the Agilent EMC ana
37. Set enable the status registers 3 Restart the measurement send INITiate Example of Monitoring Conditions Using the STATus Command Use the following steps to monitor a specific condition 1 Determine which register contains the bit that reports the condition 2 Send the unique SCPI query that reads that register 3 Examine the bit to see if the condition has changed 4 Actupon the cause of the condition and the SRQ to re enable the method The examples below show how to use STATus command to perform the following tasks e Check the analyzer hardware and firmware status Do this by querying the condition registers which continuously monitor status These registers represent the current state of the analyzer Bits in a condition register are updated in real time When the condition monitored by a particular bit becomes true the bit is set to 1 When the condition becomes false the bit is reset to 0 Monitor a particular bit condition or bits Once you have enabled a bit using the event enable register the analyzer will monitor that particular bit If the bit becomes true in the event register it will stay set until the event register is cleared Querying the event register allows you to detect that this condition occurred even if the condition no longer exists The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the CLS command which clears all event registers Monitor a change in the condition of
38. description 73 operation condition register description of bits 72 operation register description 70 operation register diagram 71 querying 65 questionable condition 73 questionable power register bit descriptions 77 questionable power register diagram 76 questionable register diagram 75 questionable status power register diagram 76 questionable status power bit descriptions 77 setting 65 standard event 68 using 58 STB command description 61 stop command 198 frequency 293 subdirectories creating 263 subdirectories deleting 264 sweep output on off 325 sweep points setting number 298 sweep time auto on off 299 stimulus response spectrum analyzer 300 time 299 synchronization 195 197 syntax of programming commands 40 system configuration commands 319 display 322 hardware query 321 instrument query 322 options query 324 T talker GPIB 50 348 terminations in commands 48 test limits maximum 215 pass fail 200 test IEEE command 197 throughput improving 45 time display format 235 display on off 235 setting 327 since power on milliseconds 325 since power on seconds 325 timing control 195 197 title display 236 trace adding magnitudes 329 averaging type 271 averaging on off 270 blank 333 commands 328 copying 328 data normalize 228 display 237 exchange data 329 format 243 max hold 333 mean of amplitudes 330 min hold 333
39. or several times Command SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA MERGe freq rel ampl gt lt freq gt lt rel gt A valid form of this command is SENSe CORRection CSET1 DATA MERGe 740000 94 1250000 31 3320000 1 7 Chapter 1 41 Programming Fundamentals Parameters in Commands Parameters in Commands There are four basic types of parameters boolean key words variables and arbitrary block program data Boolean The expression OFFIONIOIT is a two state boolean type parameter The numeric value 0 is equivalent to OFF Any numeric value other than 0 is equivalent to ON The numeric values of 0 or 1 are commonly used in the command instead of OFF or ON and queries of the parameter always return a numeric value of 0 or 1 Key Word The parameter key words that are allowed for a particular command are defined in the command description and are separated with a vertical slash Units Numerical variables may include units The valid units for a command depends on the variable type being used See the following variable descriptions If no units are sent the indicated default units will be used Units can follow the numerical value with or without a space Variable A variable can be entered in exponential format as well as standard numeric format The appropriate variable range and its optional units are defined in the command description In addition to these values the following key w
40. viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 1 MHZ n dFundamental Set the analyzer to 10MHz Span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10 MHZ n Put the analyzer in a single sweep viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Mn Trigger a sweep wait for sweep completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI n Perform a peak search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX Place the signal at the reference level using the marker to reference level command and take sweep viPrintf viESA CALC MARK SET RLEV n Trigger a sweep wait for sweep completion Chapter 3 165 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI n Perform a peak search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX Mn increase timeout to 60 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 60000 Perform activate signal track viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep Perform narrow span and wait viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10e4 Mn Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep De activate the signal track viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT OFF Reset timeout to 3 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 3000 Set units to DBM viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM Perform a peak search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX Read the mar
41. when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Condition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Questionable Integrity Enable STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register which also sets the Integrity Summary bit bit 9 in the Questionable Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Event Query STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared 314 Chapter5 Language Reference STATus
42. 1 This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition Register will set bits in the Operation Event register which also sets the Operation Status Summary bit bit 7 in the Status Byte Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Preset sets all bits in this enable register to 0 To have any Operation Events reported to the Status Byte Register 1 or more bits must be set to 1 Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Operation Event Query STATus OPERation EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Operation Event register The register requires that the equivalent or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared 308 Chapter5 Language Reference STATus Subsystem Operation Negative Transition STATus OPERation NTRansition integer STATus OPERation NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Operation Positive Transition STATus OPERation PTRansiti
43. 319 on off IF sweep 325 sweep 325 tracking generator 267 video 325 overall status register system diagram 60 P PACE for serial bus receive 321 PACE for serial bus transmit 321 page orientation printing 247 parameters in commands 42 pass fail limit line test 200 peak detector dwell time 288 peak search define 220 left 218 minimum 219 next 218 peak threshold 221 perform 218 right 219 peaks automeasure on off 287 list of 330 measuring 259 number of points 330 sorting 330 persistent state values preset to default 326 phase noise auto manual 294 phase noise optimization 293 polling method accessing status register 62 portrait printing 247 positive peak detection 284 positive transition register definition 59 power tracking 307 tracking generator 304 tracking generator fixed swept 305 tracking peak 307 Index 345 Index units 338 power sweep tracking generator on off 305 range 305 307 start amplitude 306 step auto on off 306 step size 306 power on conditions preset last 325 time milliseconds 325 time seconds 325 preamplifier on off 296 preselector centering on off 288 preselector peaking 297 preset 196 326 customized 327 to factory defaults 326 type at power on 325 type factory user 325 326 printer type 245 printing abort 245 color 246 commands 245 equipment 54 form feed 247 interconnections 54 page orientation 247
44. 5 223 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started this command is turned off If this command is turned on when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in progress that measurement will be stopped Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Signal Track On Off Marker X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time The query returns the current X value of the designated marker Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned Front Panel Access Marker Span Markers Center Frequency X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X CENTer Position the center frequency of the designated span type marker pair at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X value center frequency of the designated markers Range Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker lt active marker gt Span Pair Marker X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition lt integer gt CAL
45. CALC LLINE2 TYPE LOW CALC LLINE2 DISP ON CALC LLINE2 DATA freql amp1 1 freq2 amp2 1 Turn the limit line test function on CALC LLINE2 STAT ON Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz span to 20 MHz and resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz SENS FREQ SPAN 20 MHZ SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ SENS BWID RES 1 MHZ Turn the limit line test function on Set the analyzer reference level to 0 dBm DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Limit Lines 135 Programming Examples Using Limit Lines Check to see if limit line passes or fails It should pass CALC LLINE FAIL Pause for 5 seconds Deactivate the 50 MHz alignment signal CAL SOUR STAT OFF The limit line test should fail Close the session A ui BRR RRR RRR RK RRR KAR RR KK KR KKK KKK IK KR KK KERR KEK eee KEK KR RK include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include lt windows h gt include visa h define YIELD Sleep 5000 define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViCh
46. CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion Specifies the minimum signal excursion above the threshold for the internal peak identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak This applies to all traces and all windows The excursion is the delta power from the noise level to the signal peak See command CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Factory Preset and RST 6 dB Range 0 to 100 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Search Criteria Peak Excursion Define Peak Search CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE PARameter MAXimum CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Sets the peak search mode Factory Preset and RST MAXimum Remarks If mode is set to MAXimum peak search will place the marker at the maximum amplitude in the trace If mode is set to PARameter peak search will place the marker at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error error 202 is issued Next peak next peak right next peak left and peak table are not affected by this command They will always use peak excursion and peak threshold for search criteria Front Panel 220 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Access Peak Search or Search Search Criteria Peak Search Type Max ValuelExcursion amp Threshold Define Peak Threshold CALCulate MARKer PE
47. CEA d PER Rd P SS 45 Disable the idea Sweep output ncn 45 Select phase noise DOCU Ioas hen shoe eG CHERWS ORDERS KORR WERE RA 46 Use binary data format instead of ASCH ccs n coy 455529545560 46 Minimize the number of GPIB transactions 1ooudoiesseteso res t 46 Avoid unnecessary use of RST A i bas 47 Minimize DUT instrument setup changes 47 Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line 48 SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax 48 Overview ar GPIB Option 50 GPIB Instrument Nomenclature 122 4 secaesusus EHE 50 GPIB Command Statements auis era e FRE EXEAT 50 Overview of RS 232 Option TAX 52 meine for he Seral Terie ont eee aX eb FI RR ECRIRE GR ER PR ER a 32 Handshake ond Bad Quee b qeu de x ao ope AA attin ae Character Format Parameters 52 Modem Line 53 Data Transier Errors 53 Printer Setup and ases etooq REI t RP ER 54 hing P H OT 54 IntercongsectoB aud SEIN tbe PRX 54 56 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the Sta
48. Chapter 2 Figure 2 6 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Standard Event Status Register Diagram Power On Operation Complete Request Bus Control Query Error Device Dependent Error Execution Error Command Error User Request Event Register Mo be o 4 gt 4 w 4 k Event Enable Register 76 54 3 210 v To Status Byte Register Bit 5 ckr23a The standard event status register contains the following bits Bit Decimal Value Description 0 1 Operation Complete A in this bit position indicates that all operations were completed following execution of the OPC command Request Bus Control This bit is always set to 0 The analyzer does not request control Query Error A in this bit position indicates that a query error has occurred Query errors have SCPI error numbers from 499 to 400 Device Dependent Error A in this bit position indicates that a device dependent error has occurred Device dependent errors have SCPI error numbers from 399 to 300 and 1 to 32767 Execution Error A in this bit position indicates that an execution error has occurred Execution errors have SCPI error numbers from 299 to 200 Chapter 2 69 Figure 2 7 Status Registers Use Stat
49. Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB RR RI RII RI II IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IO III IO I AO ICAO k k k k eek f include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B definehpEMC_IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4401B strlen hpESA IDN E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA 4411 strlen hpESA E4411B strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models 4401 4411 and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON else For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn printf Press Return to continue Mn scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CA
50. Chapter 3 119 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB BRR RR RK RK RK RRR KKK KKK KR KK IK KKK IK KK KE KIRK RK EK EK EK RK KK RK Reading Trace Data using 32 bit Real Format GPIB This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Query for the number of sweep points for firmware revisions A 04 00 and later Default is 401 SENS SWE POIN Calculate the number of bytes in the header Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Sets the analyzer center frequency and span to 50 MHz SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHZ Specify 10 dB per division for the amplitude scale in and dBm Units DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 10 dB UNIT POW DBM Set the analyzer trace data to 32 bit Real FORM DATA REAL 32 Set the binary order to swap FORM BORD SWAP Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete INIT IMM WAI Calculate the number of bytes in the trace
51. Command Cross References Programming Command Cross References Functional Index to SCPI Subsection Functional Index to SCPI Subsection The following table lists the SCPI subsections or subsystems associated with the instrument function category you wish to perform The commands listed that begin with an asterisk are IEEE common commands These commands and the SCPI commands in the subsection or subsystem are documented in Chapter 5 Language Reference on page 189 Function Category SCPI Subsection or Subsystem ALIGNMENT CAL TST CALibration STATus QUEStionable ATTENUATOR see function category Internal Attenuation and Source BANDWIDTH CALCulate INITiate MEASure SENSe BANDwidth CONFIGURATION and STATUS RCL lt register gt SRE lt integer gt STB SYSTem CONTROL ABORt CORRECTED MEASUREMENTS SENSe CORRection COUPLING COUPle SENSe BANDwidth DELETE LOAD OR SAVE SAV register DEMODULATION SENSe DEMod DISPLAY UNIT EMI DIAGNOSTICS MEASure EMI MEASUREMENTS MEASure SENSe EMI FREQUENCY SENSe FREQuency STATus QUEStionable FREQUENCY SPAN SENSe FREQuency 186 Chapter4 Programming Command Cross References Functional Index to SCPI Subsection Function Category SCPI Subsection or Subsystem INPUT and OUTPUT
52. E Red stan serre era ERAS RE 195 BO E E E O EIE D E E M E A E CR 195 PM E EE E E EE E E ET 196 196 dfi ACE dq Mr ota 196 Read Sistas Byte Le 196 uo Aer 197 SeN Les EE PESE erk e Crea 197 TREO OI o a inn ost Rend e Rb EROR CU o ho E Ch REOR E Hd ap e oa 197 ABORI SWAIN 9a bbe ka ad ird 198 D APP Mc Pp er eee 198 199 ls 1 8608 199 a a a 199 pros UPC T r 200 Calculate Corechon at Freguenty RH 200 Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lanes 200 CAL Le oa di 4H P 201 Add I 201 Add Marker to List ERA ETRE ArenA TEDS 201 Append Signal Data tO List so a doh ECCE dereen Ra EP PE ad 201 Clow MUKS ada ER CU DIU arama woe artes CER DER CP ER Ee 204 Bet C onmieot Ear SIMAS Lososonas sueLbes C EO SP RE ERAS AE 205 Sel Commentior Carem SIGNA Sheek eel eae RC 205 Contents yet Comment Tor Marked So ok ERE HC GUERRE 205 D org PEUT 205 Wero BE dtor 6i Po 206 Eeireve Signal as a DURS ds hbase eS e tid abd add qai 206 Retrieve Sivas in List c ossceskeve soe cae gredet be s c PREPAR
53. E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC E7401A strlen hpEMC 7401 if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4411B and E4401B viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn printf Press Return to continue Mn Chapter 3 131 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main Program Variables viStatus viStatus 0 ViChar VI FAR cResult 1024000 0 ViReal32 dTraceArray 1024 0 char cBufferInfo 7 0 long lNumberBytes 0L long 10 0L unsigned long lRetCount OL int iSize 0 BytesPerPnt is 4 for Real32 or Int32 formats 8 for Real64 and 2 for Uint16 int iBytesPerPnt 4 int iSwpPnts 401 Number of points per sweep int iDataBytes 1604 Number of data points assuming 4 bytes per point int iHeaderBytes 6 Number of bytes in the header assuming 1604 data bytes FILE fTraceFile Open a serial session at COM1 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM if viStatus viOpen defaultRM ASRL1 INSTR VI_NULL VI_NULL amp viESA Iz VI SUCCESS printf Could not o
54. Edi eR d M dH pde Rb dde ce OUR AT IUE 195 195 195 awe es 196 196 196 oe oder elect IER eb Re ee bed Se Hb RI dedique p dtes ad idit dades 196 a redo 196 ORE ee ee re 196 heard Sees 196 197 td eee eee ee a eee ee eee dd debuit b qe ere ee re ere eee eee eee 197 PWAL aad oe aad ep RICE E ee ee eae FR der E RR 197 BDOBE e Tea Td idc de S AREE USER RUNI RE ep adeb D ET EE EE EES 198 CALCIlate BWIDIBIBANDyAdth NDB yel aAmpl gt Shoes ehh RR d 199 eee hese bee bebe ER 199 RESUME oc strc diene ober RD RR iiri RR eR heh eR HEU eee 199 CALCulate BWIDIBIBANDwidth RESult RR ehe eee Ry RR RR RES 199 CALCulate BWIDthIBANDwidth STATe OFFIONIOIL 0 56552 cc cee e e RR x 200 CALCulate BWIDIBIBANDwiltBESTAIS RR 200 LIM PA Red sida REPE ears 200 CALC COR Rector Siete TR RR YR HE I 200 17 Commands Alphabetical Listing ALC Ue MAR Ker TIS qe deese d obe dos 201 ALC ulate EMESLISUADDIMEBASUP 201 CAL Culate EMESLIStCLEBar ALLICURRentl integet ccs s6 acce RR RE ER CETERO RR GR 204
55. Event Status Status Integrity Operation Status Status cl76c The two methods used to programmatically access the information in status registers are the polling method and the service request method An explanation of these methods is given in the next section What are the Status Registers 58 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions What are the Status Registers Refer toFigure 2 2 which shows the overall status register system in detail Most status registers are composed of the five individual registers described below One such status register in the figure is entitled STATus QUEStionable which is both the name of the register and the SCPI command form used to access the register From now on the SCPI command form will be used when referring to the various registers There are IEEE common SCPI commands noted under some register names in parenthesis These commands are associated with those registers and their effects are described under How Do You Access the Status Registers in this chapter and in the beginning of Chapter 5 Language Reference in this guide Refer to the right hand part of the STATus QUEStionable register while reading the following register descriptions Condition Register A condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the analyzer There is no latching or buffering for a condition registe
56. ICALCulate EMESLIStCCOMMlent ALL stg RE TRE RE REE SHORE Kad REG RE RRS 205 CALCulate EMI SLISt COMMent CURRent lt gt esee hn 205 CALCulate EMESLIStCOMMentMARKed lt string gt 2 een 205 CALCulate EMESLISt DELete ALLICURRentIMARKedl integer 00 0c eee eee ee eee 205 SCATLCulaEMESLISCEDISPIas S TALS oc koust Coe Pee eee RR Ga E Rd OER EEE Reo deg a ee do eee RE 206 TALC Wate EMUSLISEDISPlay STATS 206 BMESLISUPRICh T CURR ent sou ERR er RAS Xd RR 206 HALLE MC SLING LENGHT 44229 Ee ve VERA dba V 206 CALCulate EMESLIStMARK ALLICURRentITOEndIDUPLicatelLO WerlCOMPlement integer 206 CALCulate EMI SLISt SELect FIRStILASTINEXTIPREVious integer 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 207 CALCU BMC SLISESORT FREQ ABC ents RA RUE Reena Eder add aa kde For qe 207 CALCulate EMI SLISt SORT FREQuencyIPEAKIQPEaklAVERagelLLINEIHILLINE2 ASCendingIDESending 207 CALCulate EMI SLISt View PB A boe E E eR grietas dd ee he dee hedge 208 208 CALC 209 CALC LLNeCMODe Jude ko ER ERE EEREEYa ERE Red ape des cid ace c 209 COAL CAUSING NIIS eb RE Sad FE AGE Rd Se Odd ee HE hE eS REESE pda 209 CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMam FREQuencyl TIME e ee m 210 LLIN Lai 0084 hx aceaeR xr S ln RO eie RUE OGRE EES 210 CALCulate LL
57. LF EOI gt Remarks Commands MMEM STOR TRACand MMEM LOAD TRAC are used to transfer trace data to or from the internal hard drive or floppy drive of the instrument The number of points in a trace is specified by SENSe SWEep POINts The trace data format is determined by FORMat TRACe DATA and the binary data byte order is determined by FORMat BORDer If the parameter to the query is LLINE1 or LLINE2 a very large positive or negative value is returned at any point outside the range of limit values A large positive number is returned for an upper limit and a large negative value for lower limits There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 Exchange Traces TRACe EXCHange trace 1 gt lt trace 2 Exchanges 2 traces point by point and leaves both in VIEW mode Trace 1 choices TRACEI 213 Trace 2 choices TRACEI 213 Example TRAC EXCH TRACE3 TRACE2 Front Panel Access View Trace Operations 1 3 View Trace Operations 2 lt gt 3 Trace Math Add TRACe MATH ADD lt destination trace gt lt source tracel gt lt source trace2 gt Adds the magnitudes of the two source traces and places the result in the destination trace Destination traces are TRACE11213 Source traces are TRACEII213 Chapter 5 329 Language Reference TRACe Subsystem Example TRAC MATH ADD TRACE2 TRACEIl is equivalent to trace 2 trace 1 trace 3 Mean Tr
58. NdB points 199 resolution BW couple to video BW 273 coupling 272 setting 272 type 275 resolution BW automatic on off 272 video BW auto on off 273 ratio to resolution BW 273 ratio auto manual 273 values 273 baud rate RS 232 bus 52 serial bus receive 320 binary data order 243 blanking the trace 333 brightness display angle 235 bus configuration 319 byte order of data 243 C language addressing sessions 102 closing sessions 103 compiling and linking 97 creating 96 example 99 opening session 100 sessions 100 using VISA library 96 using VISA transition library 97 99 CALCulate subsystem commands 199 calibration align all assemblies 229 align now 193 automatic 230 automatic mode 229 command introduction 229 Index 341 Index corrections on off 231 defaults 230 frequency reference adjustment 231 frequency reference query 230 IEEE command 193 reference on off 232 RF 231 tracking generator 232 catalog memory disk 260 center frequency setting 290 step size 290 291 clear status IEEE command 193 CLS command description 61 color printing 246 command parameters 42 commands See command list following Contents See Also specific command comment set all signals 205 current signal 205 marked signals 205 compiling C with VTL 97 condition register definition 59 continuous vs single measurement mode 249 259 control measurement commands 249 controll
59. QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Integrity Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Enable STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle lt integer gt STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register which also sets the Data Uncalibrated Summary bit bit 3 in the
60. Questionable Integrity Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Chapter 5 315 NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event Query STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition integer STATus QUEStiona
61. SO ERES RA er 247 PACE ORION eee SHOR REGAL DA PEERS PEERS EXER 247 Giese 247 ES OOo Soak LE ed RE OER NR EA 247 HCOPy PAGE SIZE AIBIA3IA4ILETTerlLEGallEXECutivelLEDGer eee eee eee 248 TICOP SIZE nia osea eet scere o ee PROP TRU RR ROSE EES Eo Redi tede 248 REFON TYPE SCRE REPON Nea ck soars 248 dc D I EU DE ED ees hes 247 ABOE 250 ON FEnpous OFRON oe 249 249 250 251 INI Date R BOUE deb ipo duce ER Ed doped ipd doa dde is 251 INU trate IM Mediate 5 RR E DE RESES 250 INFut ACIE 252 INPuEt cies odd dol Rod pot gut Expand 252 ANPU PROT CUORE DEAE RR QE TRUE AERE ES pad 253 MEA Sore emeasurements n iuo eb 9S SPESE EROR REA Kei RR IER ACER Hd d qe 255 EMEAPR quency efteq uio 257 24 Commands Alphabetical Listing Seb peta E Ea E EP EROR d EE dE Ede Red aie 258 MEBASure EMENMARKesi 12131 ADDX GUERRA ERA ES RA CERE 258 MEASure BMI MMIN STATe OFFIONION e RE kee RESO OC RR Y o HEE nC RR Y n 258 258 5
62. This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer CLS Resets the Analyzer RST Sets the analyzer center frequency span and units SENS FREQ CENT freq SENS FREQ SPAN freq UNIT POW DBM Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Prompt the user for peak excursion and set them CALC MARK PEAK EXC dB Set the peak threshold to 90 dBm TRAC MATH PEAK THR STAT ON TRAC MATH PEAK THR 90 Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete INIT IMM WAI Set the marker to the maximum peak CALC MARK MAX Query and read the marker frequency and amplitude CALC MARK X CALC MARK Close the session v ui wi 7 7 wy y d x vy wy i 7 y BRR RRR RR RR KR KR KR KK RK RK RR RK KR KK KKK KE KIRK RK EK KE KEK KR RK include lt stdio h gt 104 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B definehpEMC_IDN E7401A Hewlett Packar
63. Unused This bit is always set to 0 11 2048 Unused This bit is always set to 0 12 4096 Unused This bit is always set to 0 13 8192 Unused This bit is always set to 0 14 16384 Unused This bit is always set to 0 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 Questionable Status Event Enable Register The Questionable Status Event Enable Register lets you choose which bits in the Questionable Status Event Register will set the summary bit bit 3 of the Status Byte Register to 1 Send the command STATus QUEStionable ENABle num where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Chapter 2 77 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions For example to enable bit 9 and bit 3 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1 the Questionable Status Summary bit of the Status Byte Register will be set to 1 send the command STATus QUEStionable ENABle returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the STATus QUEStionable ENABle num command STAT QUES ENAB 520 512 8 The command Figure 2 11 Questionable Status Event Enable Register numnber is afia eni folo 7 61 s a 312 10 STATus QUEStionable ENABle num STATus QUEStionable ENABle cb95a Bit descriptions in the Status Questionable Condition Register are given in the following table
64. View gt Max MEASure EMI MMIN VIEW BOTH Selects Max trace view Key Access View Trace More Max Min View Max 258 Chapter5 Language Reference MEASure Group of Commands Measure Peaks CONFigure EMI PEAKs MEASure EMI PEAKs Measures all peaks on screen and adds them to the signal list Factory Preset and RST Start Key Access MEASURE More Auto measure Start Abort Remeasure Current Signal CONFigure EMI SLISt CURRent MARKed ALL MEASure EMI SLISt CURRent MARKed ALL Remeasures current marked or all signals in the signal list Factory Preset and RST Current Key Access MEASURE More Signal List Remeasure Chapter 5 259 NOTE Language Reference MMEMory Subsystem MMEMory Subsystem The purpose of the MMEMory subsystem is to provide access to mass storage devices such as internal or external disk drives Refer also to CALCulate and TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit line commands Agilent EMC analyzers use two types of mass storage devices e 3 5 inch disk drive high density 1 44 MBytes formatted designated A Part of flash memory and treated as a device designated C The MMEMory command syntax term lt file name gt is a specifier having the form drive directory name ext where the following rules apply e drive is Or e is the path name e name is a DOS file name of up to
65. a failure has occurred while trying to align the tracking generator TG RF Align Failure A lin this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the RF section 16 IF Align Failure A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the IF section 32 LO Align Failure 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the local oscillator LO 64 ADC Align Failure A lin this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the analog to digital converter ADC 128 FM Demod Align Failure A 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the FM demodulation circuitry 256 Misc Sys Align Failure 1 in this bit position indicates that a failure has occurred while trying to align the quasi peak detector 512 Unused This bit is always set to 0 10 1024 Tracking Peak Needed A in this bit position indicates that a tracking peak needs to be performed the tracking generator is in operation Agilent EMC models E7402A E7403A E7404A and E7405A with Option Tracking Generator only 11 2048 Align RF Skipped A in this bit position indicates that the alignment of the RF section was skipped perhaps due to an external 50 MHz signal having been detected 12 4096 Align RF Now Needed A lin this bit
66. abcd into C source txt MMEM DATA 14 Delete File MMEMory DELete file name gt Delete a file Example MMEM DEL C source txt Remarks If file name does not exist a File Name Error will occur Front Panel Access File Delete Load a Corrections Table from a File LOAD CORRection ANTenna CABLe OTHer USER file name gt Loads the data in the file lt file_name gt to the specified correction set Example MMEM LOAD CORR A TEST5 CBL Front Panel Access File Load Type Corrections Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument MMEMory LOAD LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name gt Loads a limit line from the specified file in mass storage to the instrument Loading a time limit line deletes any frequency limit lines Similarly loading a frequency limit line deletes any time limit lines Example MMEM LOAD LIM LLINE2 C mylimit lim Remarks There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 Front Panel Access File Load Type Limits Chapter 5 261 Language Reference MMEMory Subsystem Load an Instrument State from a File MMEMory LOAD STATe 1 lt file name gt The contents of the state file are loaded into the current instrument state Example MMEM LOAD STAT 1 C mystate sta Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe If the revision of the state being loaded
67. be called Print something while waiting When interrupt occurs it will be handled by cEnter 0 iResult 20 iSrgOccurred 0 cBuf 3 0 interrupt handler void WaitForSRQ long lCount OL iSrqOccurred 0 150 Programming Examples Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done printf t nWaiting for an SRQ to be generated for 1Count 20 lCount 10 iSrqOccurred 0 1Count long lCount2 0 printf while 1Count2 lt 100 amp amp iSrqOccurred 0 YIELD printf Mn Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA 4411 strlen hpESA E4411B strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models EA4401B E4411B and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn printf Press Return to continue Mn scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Interrupt handl
68. c RD MET T 322 Error Information DUBEY 322 Locate SCFI Command EDS 323 Host Identification QUEE 246424644 bees e a AT Ed RE ARE ee 323 License Key Install Application Option 0 324 E E EE EE EEIE E E E E E 324 Livery Instrimsnt OpHONS 324 Power Un Elapsed ad Howe EE rd ed PHI REF EE d 325 Power On IME 325 Po Wi E os ode te ha Eri E EA 325 Enable IF Video Sweep Output uaa oed wq qo ek ooo EUR P RR od dedos 325 326 SUIS Roget 326 Preset 326 nav Dose ORE eb ER 321 speaker Contool XT rea AA d 327 0944564 327 I EP 327 328 Ln DINER A eed Cox pH EIER EET Ti Aa ED LIP qu 328 Trauster Trace Data a 44cceeas 328 e e DP 220 Toce omo Mr 329 Didar e PCR 330 PPP 330 Query Number of Peaks Found ERR EAR ARE 330 Pak SUEDE EC E DOE Pb edo e d d P ded Pd dada d 330 Smooth Tace Dala MEME e e a 330 Number ot Points for Sm
69. can be combined to average out measurement variations Detector is set to average and Avg type is set to power RMS to measure RMS voltage avg power As a best practice set amplitude scale DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC prior to average type VIDeo logarithmically averages the power of the video data typical units are dBm This command is equivalent to pressing front panel keys BW Avg Avg Type Video RMS averages the linear power of successive measurements typical units are watts The following parameters of this command are supported but not recommended for new designs They are provided for limited compatibility to other analyzers When used the parameters are converted as follows TYPE LINear maps to RMS TYPE LPOWer maps to VIDeo TYPE POWer maps to RMS TYPE SCALar and VOLTage will map to VIDeo If the amplitude scale is LOG the setting is allowed but an error is generated TYPE LOG maps to VIDeo If the amplitude scale is not LOG linear or Y Axis Units Hz the setting is allowed but an error is generated For compatibility with firmware revisions prior to A 08 00 query SENSe AVERage TYPE will return LPOW or POW if LPOW or POW is used during the setting and no further changes have occurred to set the average type such as from the front panel Factory Preset and RST VID History Changed with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access BW Avg Avg Type Chapter 5 271 Language Referen
70. command CALCulate NTData STATe OFF ON 0 1 Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 327 6 to 327 6 dB Default Unit Current active units Front Panel Access View Trace Normalize Norm Ref Lvl Normalized Reference Level Position DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition integer DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition Selects the position of the normalized reference level The top and bottom graticule lines correspond to 10 and 0 respectively See command CALCulate NTData STATe OFF ON 0 1 Factory Preset and RST 10 Range integer Front Panel Access View Trace Normalize Norm Ref Posn Chapter 5 239 Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem Trace Y Axis Amplitude Scaling DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision rel 1 gt DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision Sets the per division display scaling for the y axis when y axis units are set to amplitude units Factory Preset and RST 10 dB Range 0 1 to 20 0 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scale Div Trace Y Axis Frequency Scaling DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency freq DISPlay WINDow TRACe SCALe PDIVision FREQuency This command sets the per division display scaling for the y axis when the y axis units are set to frequency units such as when looking at FM deviation with the command SENSe DEMod VIEW STATe OFF ON 0 1 Factory Preset and RST 20 kHz
71. desktop computer program must be able to properly interpret the meaning of a break and take appropriate action Chapter 1 53 Programming Fundamentals Printer Setup and Operation Printer Setup and Operation Equipment Agilent EMC Analyzer equipped with standard I O Option A4H GPIB and Parallel Interface or Option 1AX RS 232 and Parallel Interface IEEE 1284 compliant printer cable such as HP 2950 Supported printer equipped with a parallel interface A supported printer is one that accepts Printer Control Language Level 3 or 5 PCL3 printers include most HP DeskJet printers PCLS printers include most HP LaserJet printers and the 1600C DeskJet printer Interconnection and Setup 54 Turn off the printer and the analyzer Connect the printer to the analyzer parallel I O interface connector using an IEEE 1284 compliant parallel printer cable If appropriate configure your printer using configuration menus or switches Refer to your printer s documentation for more specific information on configuring your printer Turn on the analyzer and printer Press Print Setup on the front panel and then press the Printer Type menu key Printer Type accesses the following keys None None disables the analyzer from attempting to print to a printer This is the appropriate setting if no printer is connected to the analyzer Custom Custom allows you to access the Define Custom menu keys The Define Cust
72. does not have a service request pending A service request is considered to be pending between the time the analyzer SRQ process is initiated and the time the controller reads the status byte register The SRQ process sets the GPIB SRQ line true It also sets the status byte request service RQS bit to 1 Both actions are necessary to inform the controller that the analyzer requires service Setting the SRQ line only informs the controller that some device on the bus requires service Setting the RQS bit allows the controller to determine which device requires service Chapter 2 63 NOTE Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions If your program enables the controller to detect and respond to service requests it should instruct the controller to perform a serial poll when the GPIB SRQ line is set true Each device on the bus returns the contents of its status byte register in response to this poll The device whose RQS bit is set to 1 is the device that requested service When you read the analyzer status byte register with a serial poll the RQS bit is reset to 0 Other bits in the register are not affected Restarting a measurement with the INITiate command can cause the measuring bit to pulse low A low pulse causes an SRQ if the status register is configured to SRQ upon end of measurement To avoid this perform the following steps 1 Set INITiate CONTinuous off 2
73. eight characters letters A Z a z and numbers 0 9 only lower case letters are read as uppercase ext is an optional file extension using the same rules as name but consists of up to three characters total Catalog the Selected Memory Location MMEMory CATalog drive where drive is or Lists all files in the specified drive The return data will be of the format mem used mem free file listing Each file listing indicates the name and size of one file in the directory list file name file size Example Catalog drive C which is in instrument memory MMEMory CATalog Front Panel Access File Copy a File MMEMory COPY file namel gt lt file name2 gt To copy a file the source file name is file namel and the destination file name is file name2 Example COPY C oldname sta A newname sta 260 Chapter5 Language Reference MMEMory Subsystem Front Panel Access File Copy Move Data to File MMEMOry DATA file name gt lt definite length block MMEMory DATA file name Loads definite length block into the memory location lt 1 name The query returns the contents of the file name in the format of a definite length block This command can be used for copying files out of the analyzer over the remote bus Refer to chapter 3 Programming Examples for more information Example Load
74. handshaking can he used to help solve this problem These and other topics are discussed in greater detail in your programming language documentation Settings for the Serial Interface Please refer to the documentation on your computer and I O to configure the serial interface Some common serial interface configuration settings are Baud Rate to 9600 Bits per character to 8 Parity to Odd or disabled Stop bits to 1 Handshake and Baud Rate To determine hardware operating parameters you need to know the answer for each of the following questions about the peripheral device Which of the following signal and control lines are actively used during communication with the peripheral Data Set Ready DSR Clear to Send CTS What baud rate is expected by the peripheral Character Format Parameters To define the character format you must know the requirements of the peripheral device for the following parameters Character Length Eight data bits are used for each character excluding start stop and parity bits e Parity Enable Parity is disabled absent for each character Stop Bits One stop bit is included with each character 52 Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX Modem Line Handshaking To use modem line handshaking for data transfer you would consider the following tasks 1 Set Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send modem lines to active state 2 Check Da
75. interface name is determined when you run the VTL Configuration Utility This name is usually the interface type followed by a number The following table illustrates the format of the rsrcName for the different interface types Interface Syntax VXI VXI board VXI logical address INSTR GPIB VXI GPIB VXI board VXI logical address INSTR GPIB GPIB board primary address secondary address INSTR The following describes the parameters used above board This optional parameter is used if you have more than one interface of the same type The default value for board is 0 VXI logical address This is the logical address of the VXI instrument primary address This is the primary address of the GPIB device secondary address This optional parameter is the secondary address of the GPIB device If no secondary address is specified none is assumed INSTR This is an optional parameter that indicates that you are communicating with a resource that is of type INSTR meaning instrument If you want to be compatible with future releases of VTL and VISA you must include the INSTR parameter in the syntax The following are examples of valid symbolic names VXIO0 24 INSTR Device at VXI logical address 24 that is of VISA type INSTR 102 Chapter 3 Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL 2 128 Device at VXI logical address 128 in the third VXI system GPIB V
76. is newer than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of the instrument all regions of the state will be loaded If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the older regions of the state Front Panel Access File Load Type State Load a Trace From a File to the Instrument MMEMory LOAD TRACe file name gt The contents of the file are loaded into TRACEI The file name must have a file extension of trc or csv The file extension determines whether a trace is loaded or a trace with its state are loaded The csv extension is for trace files using the CSV comma separated values format The trc extension is for files that include both trace and state data Example MMEM LOAD TRAC C mytrace trc Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe If the revision of the state being loaded is newer than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the revision of the state being loaded is equal to the revision of the instrument all regions of the state will be loaded If the revision of the state being loaded is older than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the older regions of the state 262 Chapter5 Language Reference MMEMory Subsystem Make a Direct
77. misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Should Agilent have a negotiated contract with the User and should any of the contract terms conflict with these terms the contract terms shall control EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AGILENT TECHNOLOGIES SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Where to Find the Latest Information Documentation is updated periodically For the latest information about Agilent Technologies EMC Analyzers including firmware upgrades and application information please visit the following Internet URL http www agilent com find emc Contents 1 Programming Fundamentals Creating VADO ERG CERES EVER etiska LASER Rd 39 Command DEDI UE eua cesa tt 40 Special Characters In Commands 6 4645 kakau D RR ERA 41 C onum 42 Besduremant Speed Last Ud bolo OAR OE E 45 Tum oir Ts display UCAS 45 C RO ENCORE PE WC EORR R OR 45 Used fixed IP Gain range ERA
78. n Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span 118 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHz n Set the analyzer to single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Mn Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAINn Specify units in dBm viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM Set analyzer trace data format to ASCII Format viPrintf viESA FORM DATA ASC Win Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI n Query the Trace Data using ASCII Format viQueryf viESA Ss n S t TRAC DATA TRACE1 amp iNum cResult Remove the from the ASCII trace data for analyzing data cToken strtok cResult Save trace data to an ASCII to a file by removing the token fTraceFile fopen C temp ReadAscGpib txt w fprintf fTraceFile ReadAscGpib exe Output nAgilent Technologies 2000 n n fprintf fTraceFile tAmplitude of point d s dBm n 1Count 1 cToken while cToken NULL 1Count cToken strtok NULL if 1Count iSwpPnts fprintf fTraceFile tAmplitude of point d os dBm n LCount 1 cToken fprintf fTraceFile nThe Total trace data points of the spectrum are d n n 1Count fclose fTraceFile Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM
79. or disables the IF video and sweep output ports for analyzers having options A4J IE Sweep and Video Ports and AYX Fast Time Domain Sweeps Factory Preset and RST On Example SYST PORT IFVS ENAB ON Range On Off Chapter 5 325 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem History Added with firmware revision A 04 00 Remarks Disable the output ports for faster measurement times Preset SYSTem PRESet Returns the instrument to a set of defined conditions The particular set is selected by SYSTem PRESet TYPE This command does not change any persistent parameters The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Preset Persistent State Reset SYSTem PRESet PERSistent Sets the persistent state values to their factory defaults The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Examples of persistent functions are GPIB address power on type and preset type Front Panel Access System Restore Sys Defaults Preset Type SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER MODE Selects the preset state to be either factory defined or user defined preset conditions Factory Preset and RST The factory default is MODE This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle History Changed with firmware revision A 08
80. other Agilent products 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Sweeping A in this bit position indicates that a sweep is in progress 4a 16 Measuring A in this bit position indicates that a measurement is in progress 32 Waiting for Trigger 1 in this position indicates that a measurement is in a wait for trigger state 6 64 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 8 256 Paused A 1 in this bit position indicates that the instrument is in the paused state of the measurement 9 512 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 10 1024 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 11 2048 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 12 4096 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 14 16384 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 15 32768 Always Zero 0 a The description of this bit refers to any measurement un
81. page 338 192 Chapter 5 NOTE Language Reference IEEE Common Commands IEEE Common Commands These commands are specified in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Calibration Query CAL Performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful The SCPI equivalent for this command is the same as CALibrate ALL Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent EMC analyzers except Agilent model E7401A If the cable is not connected CAL ALL will perform a subset of the RF alignment and a subsequent CAL RF will be required for the analyzer to meet its specified performance The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful even if only a subset of the RF alignment is performed Front Panel Access System Alignments Align All Now Clear Status CLS Clears the status byte It does this by emptying the error queue and clearing all bits in all of the event registers The status byte registers summarize the states of the other registers It is also responsible for generating service requests Remarks See STB Standard Event Status Enable
82. position indicates that the RF section needs to be aligned 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 84 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 14 16384 Align Needed A 1 in this bit position indicates that a full alignment is needed perhaps due to a large temperature change having been detected with auto align off or due to default data being used 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 Chapter 2 85 Figure 2 14 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated Register Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Register Diagram Oversweep Meas Uncal Signal Indent On QUEStionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register QUEStionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Positive Transition Filter QUEStionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Negative Transition Filter QUEStionable Status integrity Uncalibrated Event Register QUEStionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated vent Enable Register To Questionable Integrity Status Register Bit 3 15 14 13 12 11109 87 65 4 3 21 0 15 14 13 12 1 109 87 65 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11109 87 65 4 3 2 1 Bit descriptions in Q
83. power cycle Front Panel Access System Time Date Time Date On Off Display Annotation Title Data DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA string DISPlay ANNotation TITLe DATA Enters the text that will be displayed in the user title area of the display Front Panel Access Display Title Display Title Change Title Display Title Clear Title Turn the Entire Display On Off DISPlay ENABle OFF ON 0 1 Turns the display on or off Having the display turned off may increase repetitive measurement rate The following key presses will turn display enable back on 1 If in local press any key 2 If in remote press the local system key 3 If in local lockout no key the computer must either cancel local lockout or re enable the display Factory Preset and RST On Turn the Full Screen Display On Off DISPlay MENU STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay MENU STATe Turns the full screen display mode on or off Press System System to turn off full screen mode History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 236 Chapter5 Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem Window Annotation DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow ANNotation ALL Turns the screen annotation on or off for all windows Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Display Preferences Annotation On Off Trace Graticule Display DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe GRATicule GRID
84. query response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 For example if bit number 9 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8 So the decimal value 520 is returned The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable NTRansition num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable EVENt 74 Chapter 2 Figure 2 9 Status Questionable Register Diagram Reserved Reserved Reserved POWer Summary Reserved FREQuency Summary Reserved Reserved CALibration Summary INTregrity Sum Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Always Zero 0 QUEStionable Status Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Event Enable Register To Status Byte Register Bit 3 Chapter 2
85. record Set VISA timeout to 60 seconds to allow for slower transfer times caused by higher number of sweep points at low baud rates Set VISA to terminate read after buffer is empty 130 wf ey vy ui wi 7 y ay ui v7 wy iA 7 y y T Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 Query the trace data TRAC DATA Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds Remove the from the ACSII data Save the trace data to an ASCII file Close the session J F RI RII II II II II III I IOI IO I IO ICAO k kkk kk kk f include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA 4411 strlen hpESA
86. record Query the trace data TRAC DATA TRACE1 Remove the from the ACSII data Save the trace data to an ASCII file Close the session 120 a vy y vy 7 7 t x y es my y a Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB BR RI RR I e He Fe II II IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI koe IOI IO I k kk k k K K k k k kk kk kk f include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN 4411 Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViChar cIdBuff 256 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 void Route50MHzSignali viQueryf 1 IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4411B strlen hpESA E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz internal reference source for the models E4401B E4411B and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits
87. results Front Panel Access ESC with print in progress Printer Type HCOPy DEVice TYPE AUTO CUSTom NONE HCOPy DEVice TYPE Sets up the printer by selecting printer type AUTO the instrument queries the printer to determine the printer type and automatically sets itself for that printer CUSTom allows you to select a custom printer if your printer cannot be auto configured NONE tells the instrument that the hard copy output device is not a printer Factory Preset and RST The factory default is AUTO This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Print Setup Printer Type Select Report Content HCOPy EMI ITEM REPort SCReen SLISt ISETups State OFF 1 0 HCOPy EMI ITEM REPort SCReem SLISt ISETups State Selection of report content screen dump signal list and instrument setups Print Report HCOPy EMI REPort IMMediate Prints a report Chapter 5 245 Language Reference HCOPy Subsystem Remarks This parameter retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Key Access Print Select a Signal List to Include in a Report EMI ITEM SLISt PPEak QPEak AVERage LLINe1 LLINe2 CORRection UNCertainty COMMent STATe ON OFF 1 0 EMI ITEM SLISt PPEak QPEak AVERage LLINe1 LLINe2 CORR
88. that is assigned to that particular marker number Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Min Search Marker Mode CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE POSition DELTa BAND SPAN CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE Selects the type of markers that you want to activate Refer to the Agilent EMC Analyzers User s Guide for a more complete explanation of this function Position selects a normal marker that can be positioned on a trace and from which trace information will be generated Delta activates a pair of markers one of which is fixed at the current marker location The other marker can then be moved around on the trace The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers Band activates a pair of band markers where each marker can be independently positioned on the trace The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers Span activates a pair of span markers where the marker positioning is controlled by changing the span and or center frequency between the two markers The marker readout shows the difference between the two markers Remarks If a marker is not active when the mode is queried Off will be returned Chapter 5 219 NOTE Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Front Panel Access Marker Normal Marker Delta Marker Delta Pair Ref Delta Marker Span Pair Span Center Define Peak Excursion CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion rel 1 gt
89. the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable CALibration Register Figure 2 13 Questionable Status Calibration Register Diagram Reserved Reserved TG Align Failure RF Align Failure IF Align Failure LO Align Failure ADC AlignFailure FM Demod Align Failure Misc Sys Align Failure Unused Tracking Peak Needed Align RF Skipped Align RF Now Needed Reserved Align Needed Always Zero 0 QUEStionable Status Son Regt QUEStionable Status 15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210 Transition Filter QUEStionable Status MERERESELEEESEE Neds 15 14 13 2 11 10098 76 54 3 2 1 Ti Fil QUEStionable Status EEEEEZZIIZZIZIE Event Regieter 7 E E 12 11 10987654321 ZI T 20 4 L L L Lr b I ae 4 amp Questionable Status BERE 15 14 13 12 11 10 876543210 Enable Register To Questionable Status Register Bit 8 cl78a Chapter 2 83 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Calibration Condition Register are given in the following table Bit Decimal Value Description 0 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products TG Align Failure A in this bit position indicates that
90. the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Frequency Event Query STATus QUEStionable FREQuency EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Frequency Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Chapter 5 313 NOTE NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Frequency Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Frequency Event register
91. the instrument status register viPrintf viESA SRE 0 Mn Clear the status byte of the instrument viPrintf viESA CLS n Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 154 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Determine if an Error has Occurred Determine if an Error has Occurred RR RI RR I RI II II IOI III IOI IO I IO I AO k k kk eek f Determine if an error has occurred This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer CLS Resets the Analyzer RST Sets the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error message has occurred STAT QUES ENAB 512 STAT QUES INT ENAB 8 ESE 35 SRE 104 Set the center frequency to 500MHz and span to 100MHz SENS FREQ CENT 500 MHZ SENS FREQ SPAN 100 MHZ Set the analyzer to an uncalibrated state When an interrupt occurs poll all instruments Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer Pause 5 seconds to observe the analyzer Sets the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is uncalibrated or an erro
92. the maximum peak CALC MARK MAX Set the analyzer to active delta marker CALC MARK MODE DELT Set the delta marker to 2 MHZ CALC MARK X 2 6 Activate the noise marker function CALC MARK FUNC NOIS Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM WAI Query the marker delta amplitude from the analyzer CALC MARK Y Report the marker delta amplitude as the carrier to noise ratio in dBc Hz Close the session zi i f ay 7 id i ay oy v 7 ay f f 7 ui ay d ay ui EJ vy ud id 0 BRK RRR RRR KKK KKK RK RK RK RR RK KKK RRR RK RRR KK ERK KKK KKK EK EK include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Noise 141 Programming Examples Measuring Noise include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B definehpEMC_IDN_E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 long lOpc 0L Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf 1 IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4401B strlen hpESA IDN E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBu
93. to the tracking generator output Factory Preset and RST 97 dBuV Range EMC E7401A 37 dBuV to 110 dBuV E7402A 41 dBuV to 110 dBuV EMC E7403A 41 dBuV to 110 dBuV EMC E7404A 41 dBuV to 110 dBuV EMC 7405 41 dBuV to 110 dBuV Default Unit dBm Front Panel Access Source Amplitude On Off Sets the Source Output Power Mode SOURce POWer MODE FIXed SWEep SOURce POWer MODE Sets the source output to be at a single amplitude fixed or to sweep through a range of power levels Factory Preset and RST Fixed Front Panel Access Source Power Sweep On Off Set the Source Sweep Power Range SOURce POWer SPAN rel 1 gt SOURCe POWer SPAN Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep Use SOURce POWer STARt to set the power level at the start of the power sweep This command is equivalent to SOURce POWer SWEep Chapter 5 305 CAUTION Language Reference SOURce Subsystem Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 0 dB to 20 dB Default Unit dB Set the Output Power at the Start of the Sweep SOURce POWer STARt ampl SOURCe POWer STARt Specifies the source output power level at the start of the power sweep Use SOURce POWer SPAN to set the change in power level across the sweep This command is equivalent to SOURce POWer LEVe1 IMMediate AMPLitude Power level sensitive devices connected to the tracking gener
94. viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10e4 n Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep Signal track off viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT OFF n Reset timeout to 3 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 3000 Set marker amplitude in Volts viPrintf 1 UNIT POW V n Perform a peak search and wait for completion viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Chapter 3 175 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 Query and read the marker amplitude in Volts Store the result in the fHarmV array viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n 1 amp fHarmV lNum Change the amplitude units to dBm viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Read the marker amplitude viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n 1 amp fHarmDbm 1Num Sum the square of each element in the fHarmV array and calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic relative to the fundamental for 1Num 2 lNum lMaxHarmonic 1Num dSumSquare dSumSquare pow double fHarmV lNum 2 0 Relative Amplitude fRelAmptd l1Num fHarmDbm lNum fFundaAmptdDbm Calculate the total harmonic distortion by dividing the square root of the sum of the squares dSumSquare by the fundamental amplitude in Volts dFundaAmptdV Multiply this value by 100 to obtain a result in percent dPrentDistort sqrt double dSumSquare dFundaAmptdV 10
95. 0 Fundamental amplitude in dBm printf nFundamental Amplitude 1 dB n fFundaAmptdDbm Fundamental frequency in MHz printf Fundamental Frequency is 1 MHz n dFundamental 10e5 Relative amplitude of each harmonic in dBc for 1Num 2 lNum lMaxHarmonic 1Num printf Relative amplitude of Harmonic d 1 dBc n 1Num fRelAmptd 1Num Total harmonic distortion in percent printf Total Harmonic Distortion 1f percent n dPrentDistort Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 176 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements J F F RR I e He He II II IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IO I IOI IO I IO I IO IAC IA k k k kk eek Average c Agilent Technologies 1999 This C programming example does the following Performs Power Averaging of Multiple ESA Measurements and Writes the Result back to a Trace for display The required SCPI instrument commands are given as reference Opens a GPIB device at address 18 Clears and Resets the Analyzer to a known state SYST PRES TYPE FACT RST Identify the Instrument model IDN Sets the analyzer center frequency and span SENS FREQ CENT freq SENS FREQ SPA
96. 0 C ALibratonsP ing ok RSTO rr RP AUC CERO Cp ERU E d at id eain Vici deine 230 CALibration FREQuency REFerence COARse setting e e n 231 CALibration PREQuncy REFeieuce 231 CALibraton FREQuen y REFerence FINE R MESS DER P ELE RO ERU pd Re 231 C ALibratiom P PBEOueDCy REPorace FINE uasa bese Rae IKE RFPREWR Je Beads WERE E EISE 231 CA Labrie PREQueney B BPRIBUE 230 21 Commands Alphabetical Listing 8 OFFRONO 25 CAL breton RE Onetigy Ss TATSTE asus S RE ROGER bE eI UR HER ERE RR ERR E EEE PME 231 iu siena A E aot ic brie bees ke hake bar ks one abe Ok BASS NSS RGdURP ona 231 CALibralion SOUR CESTAISG GREGOR ER RR ORE PRAG RA 252 CAL mie SOURCES TATE bck ye cis cades dp ERE EXER kee eiie 232 ALIBIBHONETOL odie ng eb Gd dede 232 liic I Hnc E 232 SEI Ir jo 229 CALDEO EE D ook 229 CONF gue 254 EMLAFReguency 257 CONFisureEMEMARReQ 12114 258 259 CONFigure EMESLIStI CURRent IMARKedlALL leseeeeeeeeeeee eee hh hn 259 UP ALLNONE VC t P POPE EROR RE RAS 233 wd
97. 00 Previous firmware revisions had default type FACTory Remarks SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE defines the user preset Front Panel Access System Power On Preset Preset Type 326 Chapter5 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem Save User Preset SYSTem PRESet USER SAVE Saves the current instrument conditions as the user preset condition Front Panel Access System Power On Preset Save Type Preset Speaker Control SYSTem SPEaker STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem SPEaker STATe Turns the internal speaker on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod Speaker On Off Set Time SYSTem TIME hour minute second SYSTem TIME Sets the time of the real time clock of the instrument Hour must be an integer 0 to 23 Minute must be an integer 0 to 59 Second must be an integer 0 to 59 Front Panel Access System Time Date Set Time SCPI Version Query SYSTem VERSion Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies Chapter 5 327 NOTE Language Reference TRACe Subsystem TRACe Subsystem The TRACe subsystem controls access to the internal trace memory of the analyzer Refer also to CALCulate and MMEMory subsystems for more trace and limit line commands Copy Trace source trace dest trace Transfers the source trace to the destination trace and leaves the destination trace in VIEW mode
98. 287 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector AVERage STATe ce eee 287 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector PPEak DWELI lt time gt 0 0 0 0 cece eer hr 288 SENSeERMEMEASure DEIectorPPBaEk DWELL RECO ROEM ES REE 288 ISENS LEMLEMEA Sure DE Tecto PPESK gue Rd ee ddp qd emet p aes 287 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector PPEak STATeJOFFIONIOIL 0 ccc cee eee eee 287 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector QPEak DWELI lt time gt eeeeeeeeeee tretat kees 288 32 Commands Alphabetical Listing SENS amp EEEMEMBASureDBIPsctecOPBEaEC DWELI 288 SENSe EMEMBASure DELPecter QPEak 287 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector QPEak STATeJOFFIONIOIL 0 0 cc eee eee 287 SENSe EMUMBASure PCENIer 5S OBPEIONIOIT Reeder RR ERR x 288 SENSELEMLMBAS wre PCENter cocina cdc cc RR ER ED RE E P ERR ICE ACER ob ORE 288 SENSe EMI MEASure PEAKs SGTMargin cece ee cee eee cnet nace hn hh hh 289 SENSe EMI MEASure PEAKs SGTMargin STATeJONIOFFIIO 0 cee 289 ESENSe EMEMEASure RANGE DWELISUINE gt 11d escas RR 289 SENSeELEMUNIEASue RANGEDWELI Sa ER RO EGRE CREE EE 289 SIUE REG CREDE RE ER dade Sod WERE pace pa 290 CSENSE FREQuency CENTer UPIDOWN P REX GRRE ERE C Obi duda d 290 SENSe FREQuency CENTer
99. 5 lt ample 295 33 Commands Alphabetical Listing SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO RR I 295 SENSe POWer RET ATTeuuattounc AUTO IER 295 295 SENSE OBPIONION 296 3ENSEELPONEEERBEGAINESTAISIT iau re be E A ER OR EERE GREE ERLE ROSES ADEN OR REA 296 SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer lt gt cece hh 296 SENSeEPOWerL RPFEMIXeEB ANGG UPPer eed ik eee ed See EES 296 SENSE POW a cic o ER RR GEORG Ss RR GR OO EEE ERE TONES ORES RRS 296 SENS ius eo oec eO GE Fa de pP E CY E 296 pa ed eee Oe Re dood ee EG Sead ES dp E Rt PE Nor PEERS RS 297 S WEP POIN number of ponas 262 2944 qae ERESPSERIPpEE IEEE P 298 SENSE ES Bee PONS PR ES WERDEN CERE I Keen TL E a P Ee ieee es 298 SENSe SWEep SPACing LINeadLOGa nthmie 652 4602 steel eee RR ih epee bonnes eee REO EG ae 257 SENSe SWEep SPACing LINeadLOGartbimie Rae Ra RR RR RA 298 oss thdhisbei3PehizdPebiRGR ee iker eei Pique E Ga od GER CER REA 298 Rep IME Sfi lese o sene t sea bI EE REPRE RE DEEP 299 SENSe EIME AUTO OFFIONIDIL mk tre RR RACK RR HEED ERR a n RI Re 2
100. 69 11 Contents 12 Tur oaa EAR eee etti HORS OD OA EVA AER 270 Type of Averaging for Measurements pe dass 271 ESENSeEBANDwidth Subsection isses b RR RR RERO RR E ER 272 Resolution Bandwidth a RE ERRAT 272 Resolution Bandwidth AWE V RT RESPROE TRA OR 212 Revie Bandwidth Mode Less doe ours ideien iR Dainese Sede dr 212 Video Bandwidth SERZERRAS PARE ERR 273 Video Babdwidth Awtomatig iud aod 8 ti Ee oa ioa GR ORE CREE IER I eel Rog 273 Video to Resolution Bandwidth n E rm RE ERE RE 273 Video to Resolution Bandwidth Ratio Mode Select 2173 TYPE 275 S0b366U0ll RESP 276 o eT EE 276 Perform Amplitude Correction d dede vae 276 ser Coren DI uua sad xdi d ard aac a oh doe ed paca icd ges 276 Merge Additional Values into the Existing Amplitude Correction Data 271 Delte Amplitude C DEFOPall i dasdea sexo pP Pe rta aroni aa kaar 278 Set Amplitude Correction Frequency Interpolation tenu RR RARE 278 Perform Correction 278 Tipe tee Correc a e wat ense EX Ea a3 RC RU RR 279 External Amplifier Correction
101. 92 Chapter 5 Language Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection Stop Frequency SENSe FREQuency STOP freq SENSe FREQuency STOP Set the stop frequency Factory Preset and RST 1 06 GHz Range EMC E7401A 80 MHz to 1 58 GHz EMC E7402A 80 MHz to 3 10 GHz EMC E7403A 80 MHz to 6 78 GHz EMC E7404A 80 MHz to 13 3 GHz EMC E7405A 80 MHz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Stop Freq Frequency Synthesis Mode SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis 1 2 3 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis This command switches between two phase noise optimization modes Mode 2 optimizes the analyzer for close in phase noise Mode 3 optimizes the analyzer for tuning speed Mode 1 is not recommended for new designs This command is available for the following models only E7402A E7403A E7404A E7405A Factory Preset and RST 3 History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access AUTO COUPLE PhNoise Opt 1 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode Chapter 5 293 Language Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection Frequency Synthesis State SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis AUTO This command switches between auto and manual phase noise selection When in auto mode the phase noise optimization is set as follows e For spans lt 10 MHz the analyzer is optimized for phase noise e For spans gt 10 MHz the analyzer is optimi
102. 99 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO MODE SRESponselSANalyzer 300 S WESISTINIESAU TCRNTODBBRBT iaa EE e RAR ROHR 300 SENSE Een AME AUTO eds usd d per Qe d RP E ERR Y RR ER eee eee RP RR 299 eme six eet P E EC d ape dads dur p d 300 3ENSe SWEBep IIME GATE DBLAyT 300 SENSES TIME GATE LENGD Eco esca 300 SWEep IME GATE LENGIR Rc og do weaned honk 300 SENSeT SWEep TIME GATE LEVel HIGHILOW REG RR ORE REEDS REE OR RES 301 SENSeEGWEenSTIMESOATE LENGLU iia dab inb DEEP he edd IU ESO HE dos 301 SENSe SWEep TIME GATE POLarity NEGativelPOSitive cece eee ees 301 SENSES TIME GATE POLNY tes Geers Segre TREE aes 301 LENS Sc SW HME GATE PRES as cache eo Ier dolere EP ere ESPECIE ERES EIS 301 SENSe SW Rep FME GATE TY PE EENXGIBDOE i usto uat bae ke ed pee dae rede Rd TRE ER Edad 302 SENS SW ben IME GATE TYPE asi dash REX Heeb dee PESENE ESANI E ERRARE eee VE ERES 302 34 Commands Alphabetical Listing 35 Commands Alphabetical Listing 36 Programming Fundamentals The purpose of this chapter is to serve as a reminder of SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments fundamentals to those who have previous experience in programming SCPI This chapter is not i
103. A VI EVENT SERVICE REQ VI HNDLR viUninstallHandler viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ sSrqHdlr ViAddr 10 Clear the instrument status register viPrintf viESA SRE 0 Nn viPrintf viESA ESE 0 Win viPrintf viESA STAT QUES ENAB viPrintf viESA STAT QUES INT ENAB Clear the status byte of the instrument viPrintf viESA CLS n Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 160 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB J F RR RR I RI II II e e e IOI II e e e III I IO I IO II I IO IIIA k k k k k kk k Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer CLS Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental SENS FREQ CENT freq Set the analyzer to 10 MHz span SENS FREQ SPAN 10 MHZ Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM Perform th
104. AK THReshold lt gt CALCulate MARKer PEAK THReshold Specifies the minimum signal level for the analyzers internal peak identification routine to recognize a signal as a peak This applies to all traces and all windows See command CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Range Reference level to the bottom of the display Default Unit Amplitude units Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Search Criteria Peak Threshold Peak to Peak Delta Markers CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 PTPeak Positions delta markers on the highest and lowest points on the trace Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Pk Pk Search Set Center Frequency to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET CENTer Sets the center frequency equal to the specified marker frequency which moves the marker to the center of the screen In delta marker mode the center frequency is set to the marker delta value This command is not available in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr CF Set Reference Level to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET RLEVel Sets the reference level to the specified marker amplitude In delta marker mode the reference level is set to the amplitude difference between the markers Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr Ref Lvl Peak Search or Search Meas Tools Mkr Ref Lvl Chapter 5 221 Language Reference CALCulate
105. AR seees cesses 206 ATCP PT rc 206 Position Cursor t Signal List LuassesctsozentebmestettueSRA Ad RARE Re E eds 207 o pF a ak ay a he kd ae eh a ee 207 Specify Signal List Display Parameters lt i ci cds veces caer ead 208 SUE 209 Delete All Correction Sets Un kw TIN XE R A eee een EREXERE 209 Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation 0 0 0 eee ee ee eee 209 Set Fixed or Relative Limit LINES qUed dub od tds 209 Set Limit Line X axis DANS ices heise beech ees ERR TE ERR 210 Control Limit Line Frequency Interpolation 211 Denne Limit Line Values aod AETERNE Goes eed 6600s EX TA q 211 Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Line 0 213 Deae Linn EAE DE TE 213 Dni te Lun 8A Ke t RAC 213 Test He Data Against die Lun LING Leva aat ii ad tEn xc Ex Rad 214 Sette Magi MR 214 Diy te a A P atas 214 Line osi d US due dob d od dab bad 215 serio AS OSPERTAGN CSS 215 MARKer Subsection Ras DEEERAS LEAVES LENS RAS RIDES ERA 216 Markers Offon All TAGS E E ERR CE 216 Continuous Peaking Marker Function 216 Frequency Counter Marker Resolution RE 216 Freq
106. ARK Y WMn 1f amp dMarkerAmpl printf Nt RESULT Marker Amplitude is 1f dBm n n dMarkerAmp1 Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM Chapter 3 107 Programming Examples Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search BRR RR RK RR RK RRR KK IKK KK IKK IK KE RK KEK KEK RK KK KK Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Prompts the user for the start and stop frequencies Sets the start and stop frequencies SENS FREQ START freq SENS FREQ STOP freq Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM WAI Set the marker to the maximum peak CALC MARK MAX Set the analyzer to activate the delta marker CALC MARK MODE DELT Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM WAI Set the marker to the minimum amplitude mode CALC MARK MIN Query and read the marker am
107. ATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition lt integer gt 0sc0ce eevee ee y eye 314 Ss TATus QUEStionable FREQu encysPI Ranson 314 STATus OUESUGOnable FREQuency EVENT 520 0 ec ee er RR REY 313 STAT s QOUEStonable INTesrity CONDiUOD p RR ORE RA EREGAR EAR ners EAE PX Gd 314 QUEStonable IN Teen 314 STATus OUESBRonable TNTagnty ENABle 314 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition integer llle en 315 STATus QUEStGonable IN Tegrity NTRansition occ ccc ks coke SORES buk SURES REDE EEN ENE ERB RE 315 STATus QUEStonable INTegnty PTRausition integers 0ck secs e e bk 315 STATus QUEStionable INTesrity PT Ranson ciu cR RA RUE RAO RR Rd ROLE Rob d 315 ATs Question 314 STAT QUEStOnable N TRansition iuc oeste sh RR eR gH see oec RR S e RR RR RR 317 STAMI OVES Gona be EG Gd ERU ER GU EQ PR TUER where ben 317 PO Wer CON DINO nic eA Ra XR ROUES e ACER ORC B A eee CR RN eke eens 317 STAPis QUEStonable PO Wer ENA Ble bowed EARLEN Ei ERE REB AER 317 SS TATus OUEStionable POWerENABle c0 54 488546404 09 dels eRe S EE EVERY RR ERA GG x 317 27 Commands Alphabetical Listing STAs QUEStionable PO Wer N TRansition eII
108. B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA 4411 strlen hpESA E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4401B E4411B and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn pridntf sews os Press Return to continue n scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON void main Program Variables viStatus viStatus 0 long 10 01 long lResult 0L Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI_NULL VI_NULL amp ViESA Chapter 3 113 Programming Examples Performing Internal Self alignment if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Internal Self Alignment Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal VISA function s
109. Culate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition Position the designated marker on its assigned trace at the specified X position The query returns the current X position for the designated marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command 224 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Front Panel Access Marker Span Markers Center Frequency X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition CENTer Position the center frequency of the designated span type marker pair at the specified trace X position Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X position center frequency of the designated markers Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker active marker Span Pair Span Markers Span X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN param CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition SPAN Change the frequency span of the designated span type marker pair to position the markers at the desired trace X positions Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X position frequency span of the designated markers Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker active marker Span Pair Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt
110. D TRAC Y RLEV 25 DBM n viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT printf Moesa Press Return to continue n scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 20 DBM n viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT OFF n Turn off the local display to maximize measurement rate if DISPLAY viPrintf viESA DISP ENAB OFF n transfer data in definite length 32 bit integer blocks Select machine units milli dBm to maximize measurement rate viPrintf viESA FORM DATA INT 32 n select the byte order low byte first for Intel platforms To further increase measurement rate FORM BORD NORM could be used instead The byte ordering would then need to be done within this program viPrintf viESA FORM BORD SWAP n pre calculate amount of data to be transferred per measurement iTermLength 1 iArrayLength iNumPoints DATA LENGTH iHeaderLength HeaderLength iArrayLength iBlockSize iHeaderLength iArrayLength iTermLength BRR Rede ke eee eek ERK Write binary trace data to ESA RRR KR RK RRR KK KR KKK void write binary trace char cScpiCo
111. DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe 0 oe eese eee t bebe hh 238 ISP WN Daw TEACS PES aio b EI ES pU det OP Pee dei br at 238 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel rel ampl cscri 20 cece eee eee eee eee 239 WINDOW TRACEY SC ALSENRLevVel cds RARE Rn Rn 239 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRPosition integer lees eA 239 IDISPlayAWINDGSSTB ACe YpSCALSENRPOSIHON 239 WINDow TRACEe Y SCALe PDIVision rel RR Ry n 240 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency e 240 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency 2 2 cee ee eee In 240 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision eee m m mh hh 240 WIN Dew TRACE Y SCALE PRLE Vel 4a ee RR HR RR IRR 240 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt rel_ampl gt 0 0 0 e eee eee ee 241 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 2 0 0 cece eee eee mh hm 241 DISPlay WIN Gow TRAC SCALSEERLENSIT x Oe REI GRA REO EAR COO RE S d E 240 DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe SPACing LINearlLOGarithmic eee eee eee 242 WIN Dow TRACEY SCALE SPACING 4 636 242 Kee 255 asd qq ed id ads 297 JORM AtBORDer NORNMIAlSWAPped cedex Su
112. ESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10 printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Specify units in dBm viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM Set analyzer trace data format to ASCII Format viPrintf viESA FORM DATA ASC Mn Trigger a spectrum measurement viPrintf viESA INIT IMM Read the operation complete query viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10 printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Query the Trace Data using ASCII Format viQueryf ViESA s n S t TRAC DATA TRACE1 amp iNum cResult Remove the from the ASCII trace data for analyzing data cToken strtok cResult Save trace data to an ASCII to a file by removing the token fTraceFile fopen C temp ReadAscRS232 txt w fprintf fTraceFile ReadAscRS232 exe Output nHewlett Packard 1999 n n fprintf fTraceFile tAmplitude of point d s dBm n 1Count 1 cToken while cToken NULL 1Count cToken strtok NULL if 1Count iSwpPnts fprintf fTraceFile tAmplitude of point 54 s 128 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 dBm n lCount 41 cToken fprintf fTraceFile nThe Total trace data points of the spectrum are d n n 1Count fclose fTraceFile Close the ses
113. Freq MEASURE More Signal List Sort Signals By Pk Ampl MEASURE More Signal List Sort Signals By QP Ampl MEASURE More Signal List Sort Signals By A LL1 MEASURE More Signal List Sort Signals By A LL2 Chapter 5 207 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection Specify Signal List Display Parameters CALCulate EMI SLISt View COMMent PEAK QPEak AVERage CALCulate EMI SLISt View Specifies the signal display parameters given by the following COMM Displays the comment for each of the signals in the list PEAK Displays the difference values in dB from the measured peak value and the limit lines QPEak Displays the difference values in dB from the measured quasi peak value and the limit lines AVERage Displays the difference values in dB from the measured average value and the limit lines Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal List Edit List Comment MEASURE More Signal List Edit List Pk Ampl MEASURE More Signal List Edit List QP Ampl MEASURE More Signal List Edit List AV Ampl 208 Chapter 5 NOTE NOTE Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection CALCulate LLINe Subsection Limit lines can be defined for your measurement You can then have the instrument compare the data to your defined limits and indicate a pass fail condition Refer also to MMEMory and TRACe subsystems for more trace and limit l
114. Hz Front Panel Access 252 Input Output or Input Coupling AC DC Chapter 5 Language Reference INPut Subsystem Clear the Input Overload INPut PROTection CLEar Resets the overload protection circuitry for the input connector There is no query form of this command NOTE This command is valid only for Agilent EMC model E7401A The excessive input signal may have caused 15 dB of attenuation to be switched in or it may have completely switched the input connector out so that it is connected to the internal reference signal Chapter 5 253 Language Reference MEASure Group of Commands MEASure Group of Commands This group includes commands used to make measurements and return results The different commands can be used to provide fine control of the overall measurement process Most measurements should be done in single measurement mode rather than doing the measurement continuously If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings set up the measurement with the CONFigure command Use the commands SENSe subsystem to change the settings Then use the READ command or the IENITiateand FETCh commands to initiate the measurement and query the results Each measurement sets the instrument state that is appropriate for that measurement Other commands are available for each Mode to allow changing settings such as view and limits etc Refer to t
115. I ed aee hecho heh qu gode 306 ISOLDBOEPOWsrSTEPEINCRernment ample RR RERSCRERSCRH ER ERG RI RE E C PER Rr 306 iussu cr RA ERR XE ECRIRE Edo E S od xs 306 iSOUBce POWers anpli 307 SOUR POW S pd 307 SUU Bes PON TAC BE cid OR Ao OS 307 SOUR POW PEAR Kee bdo dee 307 SOURce POW TRCKIBB soe Cee EERE 307 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt ampl gt 0 0 2 cece cee eet nnn 304 SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UPIDOWN 0 0 0 ce ees 304 SOURce PO Wer LE Vel IMMediate A4 MPLitude i a usse re khe Re ys 304 SLATus OPERatiom insu RR HERES XR P RO REA HEURE e Rare RR D PETRO 308 308 BOSE 308 STATus OPERatonNTRansilion 22 309 SPATUSHOGPERSDONENTE E EP IE Ede tei 309 SSTATus OPERatiomPTRauasiti n lt integer em ee 309 I PW ERREUR PEARLS EELS NUR SMS 309 SIS CoP ios EVEN EIE eu eR ADIP CE ERE ER d CE d ddp db qo nce dq baa 308 BEDS PRESSE Liu cExCod d tud es
116. I detectors are selected the detector setting is locked in SAMPle mode and the user is not allowed to adjust this value until the EMI detector is set to Off Det Demod EMI Detector Quasi Peak Det Demod EMI Detector EMI Average Det Demod EMI Detector Off 285 Language Reference SENSe DETector Subsection EMI View SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI VIEW POSitive EMI SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI VIEW Selects between Quasi Peak Average EMI detector mode or Peak detector mode without reranging When POSitive is selected only the peak detector is used When EMI is selected the previously selected EMI detector is used Factory Preset and RST EMI Remarks This command is not available when the EMI detector is Off Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector View Range Immediate SENSe DETector RANGe IMMediate SENSe DETector RANGe IMMediate Performs detector ranging if enabled when an EMI detector is selected Factory Preset and RST Positive Unrange SENSe DETector UNRange Restores settings prior to last range operation 286 Chapter 5 Language Reference SENSe EMI Subsection SENSe EMI Subsection Auto Measure Average On or Off SENSe EMI MEASure DETector AVERage STATe 01 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector AVERage Sets auto measure On or Off Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Determines if the average detector is measured by auto measure measu
117. INe 1 22 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmiclLINear 209 CALCU TYPE EES 209 CAT CulaieeLLINe T II2 CONTrTOEINTerpolate T YPE sirri tissai Rex et Rx Rm Ahn i 211 CALCOlatesLELINSe TIZACONTIGEINTerpolate T YPET E Y DRESSER RE RR rh 211 CALCulate LLINe 1 I2 DATA x axis ampl connected x axis ampl connected 211 18 Commands Alphabetical Listing CALCulate OPPIONBWL 6005 ER ERAS C ALCulste A iode ree ON REPE Ee REA P SE ihe be dde deitate 213 CALC Wae LENI dictt eR b eh turbae ag E qa wee EPI PRICE PIE FR 214 SCALE ulate LLUNA 1 2 MAR Gin del nuipl cian cdc rek EPERE VEK 214 STATe OFFIONION 214 TA RG ds GER AR RR sting chy AG RS GE REPE Ge yh SA re Ree 214 TERES ERR PERPE EC 214 CALC gate T LINSTUIZ STATe OPFPIONIDIL ducta EID a 215 CALC ulate Lua piace totos cto Dp EE 215 CALC late I TPE UPPEHLCOSUS i esac pena teed bow AER bin cian 218 CXLCulated EIN TY PET e Squid s 215 CALCUlate MAREmSAQOBE ERR ERR me OEE HSE EE AOE EAR REESE 216 CALCulate MABEKSrPCOunt RESolutio
118. K IO AOR A Main KOR KR RR RR RR KR RR RK AK RK RK RR RK void main void int iLoop int iAvgArray NUM POINTS ViStatus viStatus Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI_NULL VI_NULL amp ViESA if viStatus Chapter 3 183 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the Instrument viClear viESA go to known instrument state with cleared status byte viPrintf viESA SYST PRES TYPE FACT RST n measure transfer and calculate power average of multiple traces average convert average power array back to integer array for iLoop 0 iLoop lt iNumPoints iLoop dPower 10 0 10910 dPwrAvgArray iLoopl iAvgArray iLoop int 1000 0 dPower build TRAC DATA TRACE2 nyyy header and write the result to Trace 2 sprintf cCommand TRAC DATA TRACE2 1i i HeaderLength iArrayLength 2 iArrayLength write binary trace cCommand iAvgArray enable the trace local display and return to continuous sweep viPrintf viESA TRACE2 MODE VIEW DISP ENAB ON INIT CONT ON n Close session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM J IK eee End of Main FO I A IK I IK IK IO IO IO I 184 Chapter 3 Programming
119. Ker FCOunt RESolution Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter Setting the resolution to AUTO will couple the marker counter resolution to the frequency span Factory Preset and RST 1 kHz Range 1 Hz to 100 kHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access Freq Count Resolution Auto Man 216 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Frequency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution AUTO Sets the resolution of the marker frequency counter so it is automatically coupled to the frequency span generating the fastest accurate count Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Freq Count Resolution Auto Man Frequency Counter Marker CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt STATe Turns on or off the marker frequency counter To query the frequency counter use CALCulate MARKer 1 FCOunt X If the specified marker number is not the active marker it becomes the active marker If the specified marker number is not on it is turned on and becomes the active marker Once the marker count is on it is on for any active marker not just for the one used in the command A is returned only if marker count is on and the selected number is the active marker Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequen
120. L SOUR STAT ON Mn Chapter 3 117 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB void main Program Variable ViStatus viStatus 0 Dimension cResult to 13 bytes per sweep point 8192 sweep points maximum ViChar _VI_FAR cResult 106496 0 FILE fTraceFile static ViChar cToken int iNum 0 int iSwpPnts 401 long 1Count 0L long 10 0 iNum set to 13 times number of sweep points 8192 sweep points maximum iNum 106496 lCount 20 Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp ViESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument This will set number of sweep points to default of 401 viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Read Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Query number of sweep points per trace firmware revision A 04 00 and later For firmware revisions prior to A 04 00 the number of sweep points is 401 iSwpPnts 401 viQueryf viESA SENSE SWEEP POINTS n d amp iSwpPnts Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHz
121. LCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STOP lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STOP Position the stop frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X value stop frequency of the designated marker Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker lt active marker gt Delta Pair Marker Read Y Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 Read the current Y value for the designated marker or delta on its assigned trace The value is in the Y axis units for the current trace which is often dBm Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the marker is positioned Remarks This command can be used to read the results of marker functions such as band power and noise that are displayed in the marker value field on the analyzer Chapter 5 227 Language Reference CALCulate NTData Subsection CALCulate NTData Subsection Normalize the Trace Data CALCulate NTData STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate NTData STATe One sweep of trace data is copied to trace 3 firmware version greater then A 03 03 NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A 03 03 which is used as the reference trace Then for all subsequent trace sweeps display trace 1 data collected into trace 1 data
122. Listing CALCulate MARKer 1 I2134 FUNCtion BPOWerlNOISelOFF 2 ee 217 CALGCulate MABEer 1 2 3HEFUINC Dali 217 MAR Req MAX MUM used FESSES DE 218 CAT Culate 23 2 occ ches Ee ROS 218 CALCulate MARKer 1 2134 MAXimum NEXT 0 00 0 cee eee hh 218 1 12134 eee rren 219 CAL Culate MARKer 2 219 CALCulate MARKer 1 I21314 MODE POSitionIDELTaIBANDISPAN 219 MARK er TIIZISENIODET tipe EFE EErEE ERE SE REA RI UPPEPEYCRER x 219 CALC late MARKer 221 ICALGCulate MARKer 1 2134 S TXTe OFPIONION 222 MABEer TI2DEESTATET oo RoE eS Ke whe oe a eRe I ex Y ds 222 CALCalate MAREer 11213H TRACE 223 CALCulate MARKer 1 I234 TRACe AUTO OFFIONION 26 cee ce cece a cae RR 223 CALCulate 2M TRACEAUIEO oc ds ccc ee ake dob RRP A ERES REDE 223 CALCulaeMABEKer LIZIEE RACE sc 5455 e 6 EREEREG EGRE ATA AR PER ERES 223 CALCulate MARKer 1 I2334 TRCKing STATe lessen 223 cece kt Rey RR RR Ree 223 CaALCulate MARKer 1 213 4 X partis RERGX G REYA PER Ea 224 CAELUM AREKer Ter e
123. Lit delFREQuency y e e E RR ERR RR SR EES 330 TIRACEMATH PEAK SORT ke dee A I eR pee e c I 330 TEACS MATH FEARI DATA ESERE ESI ERU ESQUERS USER eters eo ER 330 aCe Liu dug aaa erg Xx Te PRU ERN EGRE NO ERO S Ko RR NERO RE ee RR RO RR p db 330 TRACE MATH SMO POIN RE RRE Pd 332 332 29 Commands Alphabetical Listing TRACe MATH SUBTTract destination trace source gt lt trace2 332 STRACE MATH SUB Tract OLINGA NA E ro bide hee Sheed FS bee eee EPR IUE PERPE RP E RITE 333 TRACe DATA trace name2lIRAWTRACE definite length block cone SE DIESE ASCH MAIS Lu eiu LER Xu R NR RESET RRENTUR ACRES AREE Hd RR Ed 328 eT RA eA TAL Shee ABS Sup PRICE CR REG ee eS 328 TRACe 11213 MODE cee eee 333 ober derek med Peder eRe OER eee eee VU E P ed erg 333 WOR hee 335 DBELAy RS REIDREPCRPREDR RIESE GES 334 5 DELay S 334 STRIGS r SEOnence 334 TUR Miser D DELAY exi redd 334 Ternal 1 SLOPe
124. MARKer Subsection Set Span to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET SPAN Sets the span to the value of the specified marker frequency The specified marker must be in delta mode Select the delta marker mode with CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE DELTa This command is not available in zero span Front Panel Access Marker Delta Marker gt Mkr A Span Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STARt Sets the start frequency to the value of the specified marker frequency In delta marker mode the start frequency is set to the marker delta value This command is not available in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr gt Start Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STEP Sets the center frequency step size to match the marker frequency In delta marker mode the center frequency step size will be set to the frequency difference between the markers Select the delta marker mode with CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MODE DELTa This command is not available if the delta marker is off or in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr CF Step Peak Search or Search Meas Tools Mkr CF Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 SET STOP Sets the stop frequency to the value of the active marker frequency In delta marker mode the stop frequency is set to the mar
125. MMunicate SERial 1 RECeive PACE XONINONE 0 0 00000 ccc cee ees 321 SY Sem REC vel FACE dee Week 321 UY STem CONFigure HARDware STATe OPPIONIOIT 321 HARD Wares LATEST edP URP epa DR ERRORI 321 ONFPigUre DE Kao ER ER 321 iSYsTenmu ONPiure 5Y5S3Temp STATe OPPIONIONH iron kaseckbbbmRe ERRARE RARER Re Reden 327 SYokm ONFE 15 bem STAC d RR RU REC RUE 322 oy Shem a el Me PRI EUR 322 DATE years months eae Lia eq aec dore qoe bo P SIGS EROEE 322 noram DTE s uk a ok deba otc d asta boe xa daba FUE UR eer IER UP IE pb eck ee ars 322 SY Slem ERRON VERDOse OFFRONO coe ge eek ob CERES ET RR V CERA ERG ERE dp PEE eas 323 SY oP ERRO VERBO l PE AY de RE PP Ed 323 YslsmbBbhRon NEXTI Sos RESP TRE A QR Edad 322 28 Commands Alphabetical Listing pe aa 323 mos enc KEY opin 2 icense d oe eeu etc C boite Yap idet RO IHRE IG CES 324 EATER ROLE E ER Io PE ed Ep seaweed 324 Soo eb 324 324 ON MEF Sdd eR qudd CERA CR RE QE 6 325 o YS Teu PON IME edad eere e Rae ducis 325 Soo en PON TYPE PRESCULAS DE ted abe RORIS 325
126. N freq Sets the analyzer resolution bandwidth SENS BAND rbw Selects sampled as the detector mode SENS DET SAMP Disable optional Input Output functions SYST PORT IFVS ENAB OFF Turn off auto alignment CAL AUTO OFF Select the desired number of sweep points SWE POINTS points Select the appropriate display reference level and amplitude reference routing E4402B 03B 04B 05B 07B 08B or E7402A 03A 04A 05A DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 20 DBM CAL SOUR STAT ON E4401B 4411 or E7401A DISP WIND TRAC Y RLEV 25 DBM CAL SOUR STAT ON Select single sweep mode INIT CONT OFF Disable local display DISP ENAB OFF Select internal machine binary data format milli dBm Chapter 3 x i f ud ay v y ay ay oy v 7 f f v ui f v d d nf T vy a v i ii ay 177 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements FORM DAT INT 32 Select appropriate byte order Intel FORM BORD SWAP Repeat the following the requested number of times Trigger a measurement and wait for completion INIT OPC Read the resulting measurement trace TRAC DATA TRACE1 Compute running averaged power at all trace points Display measurement statistics Write averaged data to second trace display TRAC DATA TRACE2 definite length block of data gt Enable viewing o
127. NABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register which also sets the Calibration Summary bit bit 8 in the Questionable Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Calibration Event Query STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared 310 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Calibration Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Calibration Positive Transitio
128. NT 0 Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM Perform the peak search CALC MARK MAX Set the marker to reference level CALC MARK SET RLEV Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM WAI Perform the peak search CALC MARK MAX Change VISA timeout to 60 seconds Activate signal track CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON Perform narrow span and wait SENS FREQ SPAN 10e4 Check for operation complete OPC De activate signal track CALC MARK STAT OFF Chapter 3 zi i f ay v y ay ay di v 7 ay d zi ui ay d ay ui EJ v ud v f ay ii 169 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds Set units to dBm UNIT POW DBM Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM OPC Perform the peak search CALC MARK MAX 4 A Read the marker amplitude this is the fundamental Level CALC MARK Y Change the amplitude units to volts UNIT POW V Take a sweep INIT IMM Check for operation complete OPC Read the marker amplitude in volts this is the fundamental amplitude in volts CALC MARK Y Read the marker frequency CALC MARK X Measure ea
129. OA ERG RE RR d 243 SPORNBCBORDE eie 4522645060484 55 RE SEERA Re S pb GLARE pekis 243 TRACE ERE OPEP ib E DEM S pado ipte eere 243 FORMat TRACe DATA ASCiilINTeger 32IREAL 321 REALOJN Teh IG lade SE EDR REE Ade LE RARE LUCE SEL HS 243 OIE OO LC 245 DE Vice TYPE AUTOICUSTOmINONE 2 eddie ERR I 245 HOOP eV DE Vee TYPE oia secas oboe dread esie debi Scb REO EEE ad 245 23 Commands Alphabetical Listing I HCOPVy EMEITEM REPort SCReemlSLISOISETups State e er Ra REGE RR RR 245 HCOPy EMEITEM REPort SCReenlSLIStISETups State IONIOFFHIO llle 245 HCOPy EMEITEM SLISCtDELTalH IDELTa2 PPEakIQPEaklAVERage ERA ERES AER PI E p dd 246 HCOPy EMEITEM SLISt PPEakIQPEaklAVERagelLLINel LLINe21 CORRection UNCertaintyICOM Mens DAE uad pbi e dole CPP MESA 246 HCOPy EMEITEM SLISt PPEakIQPEaklAVERagelLLINel 1 2 CORRection UNCertaintyICOM Men STATE PF IN 246 IHCOP EMEBEPOrEIMMNIGdale CHEERS ESE TENS 245 TAC OPSSIMAOGCCDLO STATS rererere eet Seah 246 STAR A a TREE ERR 246 UIN 247 HCOPy PAGE ORI entation n eR IE
130. PC n d amp 10 if 10 printf Program Abort Error occurred last command was not completed exit 0 void main Program Variables viStatus viStatus 0 double dFundamental 0 0 double dHarmFreq 0 0 float fHarmV 10 0 0 float fHarmDbm 10 0 0 float fRelAmptd 10 0 0 float fFundaAmptdDbm 0 0 double dFundaAmptdV 0 0 double dMarkerFreq 0 0 double dPrcntDistort 20 0 double dSumSquare 0 0 long lMaxHarmonic 01 long l1Num 0L Setting default values lMaxHarmonic 5 dFundamental 50 0 164 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp ViESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Harmonic Distortion Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Prompt user for fundamental frequency printf t Enter the input signal fundamental frequency in MHz The user enters fundamental frequency scanf 1f amp dFundamental Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental frequency
131. Preset and RST Off Remarks Sets the dwell time Setting the Dwell Time for Average Peak SENSe EMI MEASure DETector AVERage DWEL1 lt time gt SENSe EMI MEASure DETector AVERage DWEL1 Sets the dwell time for the average detector for Measure at Marker Automeasure and Remeasure Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Sets the dwell time Preselector Centering On or Off E7403A E7404A E7405A only SENSe EMI MEASure PCENter STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe EMI MEASure PCENter STATe Determines if preselector centering should be performed prior to Measure at Marker Automeasure and Remeasure Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Available on Agilent E7403A E7404A and 7405 only 288 Chapter 5 Language Reference SENSe EMI Subsection Setting the Dwell Time for Range SENSe EMI MEASure DWEL1 lt time gt SENSe EMI MEASure RANGe DWEL1 Sets the dwell time for ranging for Measure at Marker Automeasure and Remeasure Factory Preset and RST 200 ms Auto Measure Margin On or Off SENSe EMI MEASure PEAKs SGTMargin STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe EMI MEASure PEAKs SGTMargin Sets automeasure margin On or Off Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks If on when automeasuring only the signals above the margin are measured and added to the signal list Key Access MEASURE More Auto Measure Chapter 5 289 NOTE Language R
132. Programmer s Guide Agilent Technologies EMC Series Spectrum Analyzers This guide documents firmware revision A 08 xx This manual provides documentation for the following instruments E7401A 9 kHz 1 5 GHz 7402A 9 kHz 3 0 GHz E7403A 9 kHz 6 7 GHz 7404 9 kHz 13 2 GHz 7405 9 kHz 26 5 GHz GE Agilent Technologies Manufacturing Part Number E 7401 90053 Supersedes 7401 90028 Printed in USA December 2001 Copyright 1999 2001 Agilent Technologies nc WARNING CAUTION NOTE Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Safety Information The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with the symbols and their meaning before operating this instrument Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Caution denotes a ha
133. RN Returns current instrument state data in a block of defined length The information is in a machine readable format only Sending the query returns the following format PQQQSYST SET NMMM lt state data The following example is a response to LRN The actual sizes will vary depending on the instrument state data size Example 42031SYST SET 42016 lt state data gt 194 Chapter5 Language Reference IEEE Common Commands The number 4 P in the preceding query response format means there are 4 numbers that make up the size of the data that follows In this example 2031 bytes will follow the number 4 42031 2031 and 2016 QQQ and MMM in the preceding query response format represent data size in bytes The state can be changed by sending this block of data to the instrument after removing the size information Example SYST SET NMMM lt state data Operation Complete OPC OPC Sets bit 0 in the standard event status register to 1 when all pending operations have finished The query stops any new commands from being processed until the current processing is complete Then it returns a 1 and the program continues This query can be used to synchronize events of other instruments on the external bus OPC and OPC are currently effective only when immediately preceded by either the INITiate IMMediate ora CALibration command Query Instrument Options This function is provided in the analyzer SCPI lan
134. Range 1 kHz to 240 kHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scale Div Trace Y Axis Reference Level DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel lt 1 gt DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVe1 Sets the amplitude value of the reference level for the y axis Factory Preset and RST 107 dBuV Range EMC E7401A 149 9 to 50 dBm EMC E7402A E7403A E7404A E7405A 149 9 to 55 dBm 240 Chapter5 Default Unit Remarks Front Panel Access Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem 42 9 to 162 dBuV with zero reference level offset and max mixer level 97 dBy V Current active units The input attenuator setting may be affected The minimum displayed value of reference level is 327 6 dBm and the maximum displayed value is 327 6 dBm See the remarks given for the command DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVe1 OFFSet rel ampl Amplitude Y Scale Ref Level Trace Y Axis Reference Level Offset DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet rel ampl DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet Sets the amplitude level offset for the y axis Factory Preset and RST Range Default Unit Remarks Chapter 5 0 dB 327 6 to 327 6 dB dB The sum of reference level offset reference level is clipped to the range 327 6 to 327 6 dB The maximum limits are determined by the setting of the first of these two parameters within the boundaries of their individ
135. Reference Level Auto Ranging DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe LOG RANGe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow TRACe SCALe LOG RANGe AUTO This command enables and disables auto ranging The speed benefits gained with this command are realized only when in narrow resolution digital bandwidths The setting of auto range has no effect when in analog resolution bandwidths Factory Preset and RST On History This command is available with firmware revision A 04 00 and later Remarks When using digital resolution bandwidths RBW 1 kHz the analyzer uses IF Gain auto ranging to set the optimum signal gain for digital processing This technique produces the greatest measurement range without overloading the digital system To increase the measurement speed this IF Gain auto ranging may be set to fixed mode When in fixed mode make sure the signal 238 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem is not set above the reference level and the reference is set so that the signal is within the display range When in fixed mode the measurement has approximately 70 dB of display range Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale IF Gain Auto Fixed front panel access is available with firmware revision A 06 00 and later Normalized Reference Level DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel rel 1 gt DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe NRLevel Sets the normalized reference level See
136. S 1 7e3Hz CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 v The last command below returns different results than the commands above it The number 3 in the command causes this See the command description for more information CALC MARK Y e calc mark y e CALC MARK2 Y SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGative POSitive SAMPle e DET FUNC NEG e Sense Detector Function Sample INITiate CONTinuous 01 Chapter 1 The sample commands below are identical e INIT CONT ON e init continuous 1 39 NOTE Programming Fundamentals Command Notation Syntax Command Notation Syntax A typical command is made up of key words set off by colons The key words are followed by parameters that can be followed by optional units Example TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel 2 5V The instrument does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters In the documentation upper case letters indicate the short form of the key word The upper and lower case letters together indicate the long form of the key word Either form may be used in the command Example Trig Seq Vid Lev 2 5V 15 the same as trigger sequence video level 2 5V The command TRIGG Sequence Video Level 2 5V is not valid because TRIGG is neither the long nor the short form of the command 40 Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Special Characters in Commands Special Characters in Commands Special Meaning Examp
137. SCII The ASCII data format is the instrument default since it is easier for people to understand and is required by SCPI for RST However data input output is faster using the binary formats FORMat DATA REAL 64 selects the 64 bit binary data format for all your numerical data queries You may need to swap the byte order if you are using a PC rather than UNIX 1 is the default byte order Use FORMat BORDer SWAP to change the byte order so that the least significant byte is sent first When using the binary format data is sent in a block of bytes with an ASCH header A data query would return the block of data in the following format DNNN lt nnn binary data bytes To parse the data e Read two characters D where D tells you how many characters follow the D character e Read D characters the resulting integer specifies the number of data bytes sent Read the bytes into a real array For example suppose the header is 512320 The first character digit in the header 5 tells you how many additional digits there are in the header The 12320 means 12 thousand 3 hundred 20 data bytes follow the header Divide this number of bytes by your current data format bytes data point 8 for real 64 For this example there are 1540 data points in the block of data Minimize the number of GPIB transactions When you are using the GPIB for control of your instrument each transaction requires driver overh
138. SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHZWMn Specify dB per division of each vertical division amp Units viPrintf viESA DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 10dB n viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Set analyzer trace data format to 32 bit Real viPrintf viESA FORM DATA REAL 32 n Set the binary byte order to SWAP viPrintf viESA FORM BORD SWAP n Trigger a sweep viPrintf viESA INIT IMMWM Read the operation complete query viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10 printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Chapter 3 133 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 Calculate size of trace record This will be the sum of HeaderBytes Number Bytes the actual data bytes and the Mn terminator iSize lNumberBytes iHeaderBytes 1 Increase timeout to 60 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 60000 Set RS 232 interface to terminate when the buffer is empty viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR ASRL END IN VI ASRL END NONE Get trace header data and trace data viPrintf viESA TRAC DATA TRACE1 n viRead viESA ViBuf cResult iSize amp lRetCount Reset timeout to 3 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 3000 Extract the trace data memcpy dTraceArray cCResult iHeaderBytes size t lNumberBytes Save trace data to an ASCII file fTraceFil
139. ST 0 seconds Example TRIG SEQ OFFS 1 0s Range Hardware specific dependent upon the ADC being used current state and the number of sweep points Default Unit seconds Remarks Trigger offset refers to the specified time interval before or after the trigger event from which data is to be written to the trace and then displayed Ordinarily the trigger offset value is zero and trace data is displayed beginning at the trigger event A negative trigger offset value results in the display of trace data prior to the trigger event A positive trigger offset value results in an effective delay in the display of trace data after the trigger event The trigger offset value used when the feature is enable will depend on the following parameters Normal trigger offset value originally entered e Specific instrument hardware in use Sweep time Number of sweep points The effective trigger offset value will be re calculated whenever any of these parameters change Front Panel Access Trig Trig Offset Chapter 5 335 NOTE NOTE Language Reference TRIGger Subsystem Trigger Source TRIGger SEQuence SOURce IMMediate VIDeo LINE EXTernal TRIGger SEQuence SOURce Specifies the source or type of triggering used to start a measurement Immediate is free run triggering Video triggers on the video signal level Line triggers on the power line signal External allows you to connect an external trigger source
140. STARE Re ERROR 227 CALCU alate MARK ASAA STAR ac oi sae axo S ERR ARR esting dh RU Edo Sek Redi dick ER ERE RR 22 CALCulate MARKer AAA STOP 2273 CALC gate WAR Ker ERES dH PRA ne E RACER RACE RE 227 CALC wate MARE S TID EX per eae hod Eoo or ee CE cd gb ob ob p Ree S Ae ER ER 224 CALEB MAR UE Pa EUR EC AR pd aces 217 CALCulate MAR Kier 112338 Y 7 DA Reba Cee RE E 3E 227 221 CALC wate MARK 2al ALU plate MARE eri Ne SET SPAN 222 MAR Kerf e Red ERR d CORE REOR Ra 222 CALCulate MARKer T I2384BSETESTEP 646054 OS CENSORED EES HERETO SOROR 224 CALC wate MAR Ker IBA ESET LS TOP Dee CALC wae NTDatalSTATS OPPIONIDIL 228 CAL plates sa purae doe d ECC bes dade 228 S A LibratonoN D ECEOPBPIONIIE Bees HON AS Re 230 CAL brio AUTC MODEB ALLINRE Ed Ur RR CARES UR Ko d RE 229 S DTOSMODHES e dee De VIRI NC PER TE P ee ES 229 CA LIbIQUOD bd ew d nei Resa dada quist dus 230 CA Librmetion DATA DEFIUE SEGRE EA d meer dad 230 CX Librat on OUR dd REPE RRP IE d 23
141. STATe Turns the graticule on or off Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Display Preferences Graticule On Off Trace X Axis Scale Offset DISPlay WINDow TRACe X SCALe OFFSet freq DISPlay WINDow TRACe X SCALe OFFSet Specifies the frequency offset for all frequency readouts such as center frequency except that it does not affect marker count Factory Preset and RST 0 Hz Range 500 THz to 500 THz Default Unit Hz History Prior to firmware revision A 06 00 the lower range is 3 GHz Remarks Frequency offset is not available when frequency scale type is Log SENSe SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Freq Offset Chapter 5 237 Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem Display Line Amplitude DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe ampl DISPlay WINDow TRACe DLINe Defines the level of the display line in the active amplitude units if no units are specified Factory Preset and RST 2 5 divisions below the reference level Range 10 display divisions below the reference level to the reference level Default Unit Current active units Front Panel Access Display Display Line On Off Display Line On Off DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y DLINe STATe OFF ON 0 1 DISPlay WINDow DLINe STATe Turns the display line on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Display Line On Off IF Gain Auto
142. STEP AUTO OPFIONIOIT e 290 SENDSEPBEQuetcyX ENTSESSTEP AUTGES uiae ue pRERGGQER OX CORR 290 SENSe E FREQuency CENTeESTEP INCRement RE GEAR RA Ra Rs 291 5ENSe EFREQUeUcy CEN Ter S ER REG ERR GR Ra kiise 291 GENSSEFREQuGI S CENTRE HERE HEROES RENE d 290 3ENSe PREQu oticy SPAN iuge eer RE RR Ede RES Ce Re e eR ein 291 SPAN PULL passt ER GER GO XGA 3X G RR SH REET FOES RR HE RR CR EROS 292 SENSCEFPREDUSlCSSPANJIPIEB VIQONS dri door deed cR ek e e dot ERODE do ep de s dog 292 uua dic n det eis edna Pewee EERO Yee Eq Re RE MERE Leases 291 SENS FREQuenc y STAR Y Y ER ERR Edd 292 STARI Re PE xp REN UOEN NC oars PERS E 292 SEN Se STOP CRUS RE RAE Seas Reb 293 SEN Se PREIS ou chk eke eek Rare eda Squad A qa qb A dob do OR Wd DERE dd 293 y S N Thesis iade x uEREGQC REGES RE SR KEW 293 SENSe FREQuency S YNThesis AUTO OFFIONION mmm ee 294 SENSEEPREQU dcy S Y NTh sisz AUTO RH eA EE T REL ERR RI RR e e SEER ER ORES 294 data Seka ACE goce kd pc FR EQ dedo SOLES SESS 293 ELSEN IFON TOPOM STARE ugue yee Bebe eee tok I IP NERA Rohde rd P OI E tony 295 SENSE POWerOPOsnDUSLSISIONIOBELDO urb WC RR 29
143. SYSTem CONFigure HARDware STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem CONFigure HARDware STATe Shows the current hardware configuration of the instrument on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access System Show Hdwr Chapter 5 321 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem System Configuration Query SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem Returns string of information about the configurations of the instrument Front Panel Access System Show System Display System Configuration SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem STATe OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem CONFigure SYSTem STATe Shows the current system configuration of the instrument on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access System Show System Set Date SYSTem DATE year month day SYSTem DATE Sets the date of the real time clock of the instrument Year is a 4 digit integer Month is an integer 1 to 12 Day is an integer 1 to 31 depending on the month Front Panel Access System Time Date Set Date Error Information Query SYSTem ERRor NEXT This command queries the earliest entry to the error queue and then deletes that entry CLS clears the entire error queue Front Panel Access System Show Errors 322 Chapter5 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem Locate SCPI Command Errors SYSTem ERRor VERBose OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem ERRor VERBose Adds additional information to the error messages returned by the SYSTem ERRor command It ind
144. Source traces are TRACEII213 Destination traces are TRACEII2I3 Example TRAC COPY TRACE2 TRACEI Front Panel Access View Trace Operations 1 3 View Trace Operations 2 3 Transfer Trace Data TRACe DATA trace name gt RAWTRACE lt definite length _ block comma separated ASCII data TRACe DATA trace name RAWTRACE LLINE1 LLINE2 This command transfers trace data from the controller to the instrument The data format is set by the command FORMat TRACe DATA The data is comma separated ASCII values in ASCII formatting and a definite length block in REAL INTeger and UINTeger formatting The query returns the current values of the designated trace The data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt for GPIB that is newline or linefeed followed by EOI set true for RS 232 this is newline only LLINE1 and LLINE2 can only be queried they cannot be set trace name is TRACE1 2 3 328 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference TRACe Subsystem This command does not allow setting all trace points to the same amplitude value by sending just a single value If you need to set all trace points to the same value you must send the same value to each trace point Rawtrace data is available with UINT 16 or INT 32 formatting It is unitless returns uncorrected ADC values and is the fastest method of obtaining measurement data Example TRAC DATA TRACE1 41604 lt binary trace data gt lt
145. T 1 C mystate sta Remarks This command will fail if the ile name gt already exists Chapter 5 265 Language Reference MMEMory Subsystem Store a Trace in a File MMEMory STORe TRACe lt label gt lt file name gt Saves the specified trace to a file in memory The file name must have a file extension of trc or csv The file extension determines whether a trace is stored or a trace with its state are stored The csv extension is for trace files using the CSV comma separated values format The trc extension is for files that include both trace and state data Example STOR TRAC TRACE3 C mytrace trc Range Trace labels are TRACEIITRACE2ITRACE3IALL Remarks This command will fail if the ile name already exists Front Panel Access File Save Type Trace 266 Chapter5 Language Reference OUTPut Subsystem OUTPut Subsystem The OUTPut subsystem controls the characteristics of the tracking generator output port Refer to the SOURce Subsystem which also contains commands that control the characteristics of the tracking generator Turn Output On Off OUTPut STATe OFF ON 0 1 OUTPut STATe Controls the tracking generator output Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Source Amplitude On Off Chapter 5 267 Language Reference SENSe Subsystem SENSe Subsystem Sets the instrument state parameters so that you can measure the input signal SENSe subsyst
146. The programming examples that are provided in this guide are written using the C programming language and the VTL VISA transition library This section includes some basic information about programming in the C language Refer to your C programming language documentation for more details This information is taken from the manual HP VISA Transition Library HP part number E2090 90026 If you are using the National Instruments VISA library most of this information will still apply but the include and library files will be in different subdirectories Also this information assumes a computer running a Windows 95 operating system with an HP Agilent 82341C GPIB interface card is being used The following topics are included Typical Example Program Contents on page 96 Linking to VTL Libraries on page 97 Compiling and Linking a VTL Program on page 97 Example Program on page 99 Including the VISA Declarations File on page 99 Opening a Session on page 100 Device Sessions on page 100 Addressing a Session on page 102 Closing a Session on page 103 Typical Example Program Contents The following is a summary of the VTL function calls used in the example programs visa h This file is included at the beginning of the file to provide the function prototypes and constants defined by VTL viSession The ViSession is a VTL data type Each object that will establish a communication channel must
147. UEE S I ER RP e P Pd 308 Locri IEEE TEUER 309 Operation Positive 309 Tuis os oh ae dodged Rods questo dq 309 SUD ECON ee E R3 dob eRe S 310 Questionable Calibration Condition Eh 310 Questionable Calibration Enable 24 4 22s nasus Rh anm AER Rh nh 310 Questionable Calibration Event USE ERR RES SIRE RR RE EE 310 Questionable Calibration Negative Transition 2 311 Questionable Calibration Positive Transition lt 6 lt 464 s60ess0e089she0se00e4 311 wende pce CIE OR ERO GR 311 oa E CD EE 312 bw RP 312 Questionable Frequency CODOIDOH 04265 Lex eade RR e tax iur eR eda 312 Questionable Prequency Enable wes SC ERR ERE ER eS 313 Cuesionsble Preguenty Event QUE cs 313 Questionable Frequency Negative Transition 313 Questionable Frequency Positive Transition rn 314 Questionable Integrity Condition tke kr bh EE AERE cease karrigia 314 Questionable Inleenty Enable 314 Questionable e sans edd e 314 Questionable Integrity Negative Transition eureen 315 Questionable Integrity Positive Transition
148. Unused 5 gt Reserved Unused o Reserved Unused Reserved Unused POWer Summary Reserved FREQuency Summary Reserved Unused Always Zero 0 nable Reg Reserved CALibration Summary INTegrity Sum Reserved Reserved ON oar wn Trans Filter Trans Filter vent Register Condition Register ven STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Source Synth Unlocked Freq Ref Unlocked Reserved Reserved Synth Unlocked Reserved Reserved Reserved 5 Invalid Span BW 25 2 Always Zero 0 Reserved 2 1 Reserved BHE c S Standard Event Status Register Reserved E S SITE E ESE ESE ESR OPC Demodulation HOHE Unused 8 u m Oper Complete Unused Req Bus Control Unused Query Error Unused Dev Dep Error Unused Always Zero 0 Execution Error Command Error User Request Power On CALibrating Reserved Reserved STATus QUEStionable CALibration Reserved i Reserved SWEeping TG Align Failure MEASuring RF Align Failure IF Align Failure LO Align Failure ADC Align Failure FM Demod Align Failure Misc Sys Align Failure Unused Tracking Peak Needed Align RF Skipped Align RF Now Needed Reserved Align Needed Always Zero 0 Waiting for TRIGger Condition Register Trans Filter Trans Filter Event Register Event Enable Reg Condition Register Trans Filter Trans Filter Event Register Even
149. Value 0 1 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 1 2 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Data Uncalibrated Summary This is the summary bit for the Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Register 4 16 IF ADC Over Range The signal input level is too high causing the analyzer analog to digital converter ADC range to be exceeded This may occur with resolution bandwidths less than or equal to 300 Hz in zero span 32 Reserved This bit is used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 6 64 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 8 256 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 9 512 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 10 1024 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 11 2048 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 12 4096 Invalid Data 1 in this bit position indicates
150. XI0 24 A VXI device at logical address 24 This VXI device is connected via an GPIB V XI command module GPIBO 7 0 An GPIB device at primary address 7 and secondary address 0 on the GPIB interface The following is an example of opening a device session with the GPIB device at primary address 23 ViSession defaultRM vi viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viOpen defaultRM GPIB0 23 1NSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp vi viClose vi viClose defaultRM Closing a Session The viClose function must be used to close each session You can close the specific device session which will free all data structures that had been allocated for the session If you close the default resource manager session all sessions opened using that resource manager will be closed Since system resources are also used when searching for resources viFindRsrc or waiting for events viWaitOnEvent the viClose function needs to be called to free up find lists and event contexts Chapter 3 103 Programming Examples Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion Example BRR RRR RRR RK RR KKK KKK KR KKK KK KK IKK KK KR KIRK EK KE RK KK KK Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers
151. a particular bit or bits Once you have enabled a bit the analyzer will monitor it for a change in its condition The transition registers are preset to respond to the condition of going from 0 to 1 positive transitions This can be changed so that the selected bit is detected if it goes from 1 to 0 negative transition or if either transition occurs Query the event register to determine whether or not a change has been made to how the transition registers respond The event register can only be cleared by querying it or sending the CLS command which clears all event registers 64 Chapter 2 Figure 2 3 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Setting and Querying the Status Register See Figure 2 3 Each bit in a register is represented by a numerical value based on its location This number is sent with the command to enable a particular bit To enable more than one bit send the sum of all of the bits involved For example to enable bit 0 and bit 6 of the standard event status register you would send the command ESE 65 1 64 The results of a query are evaluated in a similar way If the STB command returns a decimal value of 140 140 128 8 4 then bit 7 is true bit 3 is true and bit 2 is true Status Register Bit Values Bit Number 15 14 13 12 ck730a Details of Bits in All Registers Refer to Figu
152. ace Data TRACe MATH MEAN trace Returns the mean of the amplitudes of the trace amplitude elements in measurement units Traces are TRACEIDI3 Query the Signal Peaks TRACe MATH PEAK DATA Outputs the signal peaks by frequency or by amplitude This command uses only tracel data The sort mode is determined by the command TRACe MATH PEAK SORT The commands CALCulate MARKer PEAK EXCursion and CALCulate MARKer PEAK THReshold are used to determine what is a signal peak To get the number of signals found meeting the specified limits use the query TRACe MATH PEAK POINts Query Number of Peaks Found TRACe MATH PEAK POINts Outputs the number of signal peaks identified The amplitude of the peaks can then be queried with TRACe MATH PEAK DATA This command uses only tracel data Peak Sorting TRACe MATH PEAK SORT AMPLitude FREQuency TRACe MATH PEAK SORT Determines if the signals in the TRACe MATH PEAK DATA query are sorted by frequency or amplitude Amplitude sorts the identified peaks by descending amplitude Frequency sorts the identified peaks by increasing frequency Smooth Trace Data TRACe MATH SMOoth lt trace gt Smooths the trace according to the number of points specified in MATH SMOoth POINts There is no equivalent front panel function Traces are TRACEII213 and RAWTRACE commands 330 Chapter 5 Figure 5 5 Language Reference TRACe Subs
153. additional digits bytes there are in the header 43 Programming Fundamentals Parameters in Commands 44 The numbers 12320 indicates 12 thousand 3 hundred 20 data bytes follow the header To determine how may points in the block divide 12320 by your selected data format bytes point Divide by 8 for real 64 or 4 for real 32 In this example there are 1540 points in the block if your selected data format is real 64 Chapter 1 NOTE Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Improving Measurement Speed There are a number of things you can do in your programs to make them run faster Turn off the display updates on page 45 Use binary data format instead of ASCII on page 46 Minimize the number of GPIB transactions on page 46 Avoid unnecessary use of RST on page 47 Minimize DUT instrument setup changes on page 47 Turn off the display updates DISPlay ENABle OFF turns off the display Updating the display slows down the measurement For remote testing since the computer is processing the data rather than a person there is no need to display the data on the analyzer screen Disable auto alignment CALibration AUTO OFF disables the automatic alignment process of the instrument Automatic alignment processing occurs at the end of each sweep In a stable operating environment automatic alignment consumes very little instrument resources However in a high throughput appl
154. ain Open session to GPIB device at address 18 ViOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM ViOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp vi Initialize device viPrintf vi RST n Send an IDN string to the device printf vi IDN WMn Read results viScanf vi t amp buf Print results printf Instrument identification string sWMn buf Close the sessions viClose vi viClose defaultRM Including the VISA Declarations File For C and C programs you must include the visa h header file at the beginning of every file that contains VTL function calls include visa h This header file contains the VISA function prototypes and the definitions for all VISA constants and error codes The visa h header file includes the visatype h header file Chapter 3 99 NOTE Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL The visatype h header file defines most of the VISA types The VISA types are used throughout VTL to specify data types used in the functions For example the viOpenDefaultRM function requires a pointer to a parameter of type ViSession If you find ViSession in the visatype h header file you will find that ViSession is eventually typed as an unsigned long Opening a Session A session is a channel of communication Sessions must first be opened on the default resource manager and then for each device you will be using The fol
155. ak detector flag is turned on implicitly which allows the amplitude value to be displayed in the signal list The FETCH process allows the selection of the current signal or the signal at an explicit index If the index is out of range an empty string is returned The FETCH process also returns the current state of the signal Continuing the example above if a signal were added the list cursor were set to the last signal and a fetch immediately performed the command sequence would be CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD 1e6 3012 0n This is my comment CALCulate EMI SLISt SEL LAST CALCulate EMI SLISt FETCH CURRent The returned value would appear in this form 1000000 3012 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 This is my comment Additional detail is provided when the signal has been measured A measurement provides new detector values amplitudes from the detectors used a valid uncertainty and a potential correction factor Detailed Field Descriptions Frequency ADD Frequency is the only required field for the ADD command The frequency may be expressed in Hz or engineering notation Examples 1000000 1e6 1 545e6 FETCH The frequency is returned in Hz using engineering notation Peak Quasi Peak and Average Amplitudes ADD The amplitudes may be entered in integer or engineering notation The units are mdBm FETCH The amplitudes are returned in mdBm Chapter 5 203 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection Uncertainty ADD T
156. alignment signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT OFF n Trigger a spectrum measurement viPrintf viESA INIT IMM Check for operation complete viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10po printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 The limit line test should fail printf n t Limit Line status after de activating the 50MHz signal n Chapter 3 139 Programming Examples Using Limit Lines Print the limits line result printResult Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 140 Chapter 3 Measuring Noise J F RRR RII I II II II II IOI IOI IO IO I IO IAC ICAO k kkk eek f Measuring Noise This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Sets the center frequency and span SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ SENS FREQ SPAN 10 MHZ Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM WAI Set the marker to
157. an in ESA memcpy iArray amp cInBuffer iHeaderLength iArrayLength calculate a running dPower average for iLoop 0 iLoop NUM POINTS iLoop running average of dPower in milliwatts 182 Chapter 3 my 224 ii ii RJ 7 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements dPower exp dLogTen iArray iLoop 10000 0 if i gt 0 dPwrAvgArray iLoop dPower dPwrAvgArray iLoop 1 1 else dPwrAvgArray iLoop dPower end of event loop stop the timer ftime amp stop time Calculate elapsed time if start time millitm gt stop time millitm stop time millitm 1000 stop time time elapsed time millitm stop time millitm start time millitm elapsed time time stop time time start time time This is measurement time in milliseconds dDelta 1000 0 elapsed time time elapsed time millitm show measurement statistics dTimePer dDelta float iNumTraces printf tPower average of pi i point traces performed in 3 1f seconds n iNumTraces iNumPoints dDelta 1000 printf t 6 1 milliseconds per averaged measurement n dTimePer printf t 6 1 averaged measurements per second n 1000 0 dTimePer printf t i bytes transferred per trace pi bytes total n n 1RetCount iTotalRetCount return BRR RK RK IK K
158. an to 10MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10e6 n Set the analyzer in a single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI in Set the marker to the maximum peak viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX Check for operation complete viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10pc printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Chapter 3 143 Programming Examples Measuring Noise Set the analyzer in a single sweep mode viPrintf 1 INIT CONT 0 Mn Trigger a spectrum measurement viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WM Set the analyzer in active delta marker mode viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MODE DELT Set the marker delta frequency to 2 MHz This places the active marker two divisions to the right of the input signal viPrintf viESA CALC MARK X 2E 6 n Activate the noise marker function viPrintf viESA CALC MARK FUNC NOIS Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep completion viPrintf viESA WAI Query and read the marker delta amplitude from the analyzer viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n S1f amp dMarkAmp Report the marker delta amplitude as the carrier to noise ratio in dBc Hz printf Nt Marker Amplitude 1 dBc Hz n dMarkAmp Close the session viClose viESA
159. anaging the various GPIB activities Only one device at a time can be an active controller GPIB Command Statements Command statements form the nucleus of GPIB programming They are understood by all instruments in the network When combined with the programming language codes they provide all management and data communication instructions for the system Refer to the your programming language manual and your computers I O programming manual for more information The seven fundamental command functions are as follows An abort function that stops all listener talker activity on the interface bus and prepares all instruments to receive a new command from the controller Typically this is an initialization command used to place the bus in a known starting condition sometimes called abort abortio reset halt A remote function that causes an instrument to change from local control to remote control In remote control the front panel keys are disabled except for the Local key and the line power switch sometimes called remote resume A local lockout function that can be used with the remote function to disable the front panel Local key With the Local key disabled only the controller or a hard reset by the line power switch can restore local control sometimes called local 50 Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Overview of GPIB Option A4H e A local function that is the complement to the remote command causing a
160. ance between sweeps which could cause input device instability Factory Preset and RST All at power up Front Panel Access System Alignments Auto Align All System Alignments Auto Align All but RF Chapter 5 229 Language Reference CALibration Subsystem Automatic Alignment CALibration AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALibration AUTO Turns the automatic alignment on and off This is run continuously at the completion of each sweep Factory Preset and RST On at power up Front Panel Access System Alignments Auto Align All System Alignments Auto Align All but RF System Alignments Auto Align Off Return to the Default Alignment Data CALibration DATA DEFault Initializes the alignment data to the factory defaults Front Panel Access System Alignments Load Defaults Align FM Demodulation CALibration FMDemod CALibration FMDemod Performs an alignment of the FM Demodulation board The query form of this command performs the alignment and returns zero if the alignment is successful Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now FM Demod Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence This is a query only It reports the location of where the instrument frequency reference is generated Range INT or EXT 230 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Language Reference CALibration Subsystem Coarse Adjust the Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuenc
161. and you want to make another one of these measurements later use READ lt meas gt The MEASure lt meas gt command resets all the settings to the defaults while READ changes back to that measurement without changing the setup parameters from the previous use Are you are using the pre configured Measurements MEASURE key Also remember that Mode Setup parameters remain constant across all the measurements such as center channel frequency amplitude radio standard input selection trigger setup You don t have to re initialize them each time you change to a different measurement Chapter 1 47 Programming Fundamentals Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Multiple commands can be written on the same line reducing your code space requirement To do this Commands must be separated with a semicolon Ifthe commands are in different subsystems the key word for the new subsystem must be preceded by a colon If the commands in the same subsystem the full hierarchy of the command key words need not be included The second command can start at the same key word level as the command that was just executed SCPI Termination and Separator Syntax A terminator must be provided when an instrument is controlled using RS 232 Option 1 AX There are several issues to be understood about choosing the proper SCPI terminator and separator when this is the case There
162. ar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 long lLimitTest 01 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4401B strlen hpESA IDN E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4411B strlen hpESA IDN E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models 4401 4411 and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else 136 Chapter 3 For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn priutf Mi ecse Press Return to continue n scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void printResult viQueryf viESA CALC CLIM FAIL n 1 amp lLimitTest 1LimitTest 0 printf n t Limit Line Failed in viQueryf viESA CALC LLINE1 FAIL n 219 amp lLimitTest if lLimitTest 0 printf n t Limit Linel Passed Wn else printf n t Limit Linel Failed Wn viQueryf viESA CALC LLINE2 FAIL n 219 amp lLimitTest if lLimitTest 0 printf n t Limit Line2 Passed n else printf
163. ar frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as viet Vi f f y fi 17 fi For linear amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as 1 DT NIRE D 098 f log yj y 1 1 For log amplitude interpolation and linear frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as log log y 1 hi fi LA log y For log amplitude interpolation and log frequency interpolation the interpolation is computed as iu log y log y Bart log f log f log f log f logy Display Limits X Axis Units Freq Time Display Limits Limit 112 Edit Display Limits Limit 112 Edit Point Display Limits Limit 112 Edit Frequency Display Limits Limit 112 Edit Amplitude Display Limits Limit 112 Edit Connected Display Limits Limit 112 Edit Delete Point Chapter 5 Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Merge Additional Values into the Existing Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA MERGe x axis ampl connected x axis ampl connected Adds the points with the specified values to the current limit line allowing you to merge limit line data Up to two amplitude values are allowed for each x value If too much data is merged as many points as possible are merged into the existing limit and then an error is reported Up to 200 points total may be defined fo
164. arker Tabie CLIE 133 4 932397973 COR CI COO 223 Matkerto A PIA ee DE OSG EEE E EORR e 223 ANIG sua ia dc 8 RE OROR Id b HER do ROSE qe ad I Hd ed 223 Continuous Signal Tracking Function RR EXE RAS 223 Marker X l62i65e390R4oF PP ROSA SEC TREEE 224 span Markers Center Frequency X Vale 224 Marker X FORO ais das casa bkn ERR RES REA EXER RAT 224 span Markers Center Frequency X Posilloli 1 046548 es e e RR RR VEA Rs 223 Span Markers Span X Position E qu EE 225 Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Position 225 Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Position wine 226 Marker E A 226 span Markers Span VANS ana eden wee nase 226 Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Value 221 Delia Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Value 227 Maker 227 CALCulate NTData SUDSECHON 228 Normabze the Trace Dala eacz s hte estes LESER UE DESERTEARLQER REA M PNE RAS 228 CA LADO BUDS YSIS ches heeds heed dE piki ad iie eade a 229 Align All Instrument Assemblies cece resehREXeERE RET ERA VE LARES 229 Set Auto Align Mode All or Not RF 229 Automatic 5 1 PEE TUE 230 Return to the Default Alim
165. as FREQ but executing the FREQ command puts you back at SENSE level You must specify to gettothe MIX RANG command FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm 20dBm MIX and RANG require a colon to separate them POW ATT 40dB TRIG FREQ STAR POW ATT 40dB FREQ STAR 2 3GHz 2 3GHz FREQ STAR is SENSE subsystem not the TRIGGER subsystem POW ATT FREQ STAR POW ATT FREQ STAR POWand FREQ are within the same SENSE subsystem but they are two separate commands so they should be separated with a semicolon not a colon POW ATT 5dB FREQ STAR 10MHz POW ATT 5dB FREQ STAR 10MHz Attenuation cannot be a negative value Chapter 1 49 Programming Fundamentals Overview of GPIB Option A4H Overview of GPIB Option A4H GPIB Instrument Nomenclature An instrument that is part of a GPIB network is categorized as a listener talker or controller depending on its current function in the network Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving data or commands from other instruments Any number of instruments in the GPIB network can be listeners simultaneously Talker A talker is a device capable of transmitting data or commands to other instruments To avoid confusion an GPIB system allows only one device at a time to be an active talker Controller A controller is an instrument typically a computer capable of m
166. ation of this marker function Range Real value less than the current frequency span Default Unit Hz Remarks When segmented sweep is on a result will not be available when the NDB marker crosses a segment boundary Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search N dB Points Chapter 5 199 Language Reference CALCulate Subsystem NdBstate CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe Controls the bandwidth measurement function The function measures the bandwidth at the number of dB down specified in CALCulate BWIDth NDB of the maximum signal on the display Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks When this command is turned on the bandwidth measurement function N dB Points is associated with the active marker If no marker is active at the time this command is turned on marker 1 becomes the active marker and a peak search is performed No restrictions exist for moving the bandwidth measurement function markers to any other signal on the display However when this function is turned on all other concurrent marker functions are suspended Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search N dB Points On Off Calculate Correction at Frequency CALCulate CORRection ATFREquency freq Calculates the total correction factor for a specified frequency point Example CALC CORR ATFRE 1 5E8 Remarks Refer to SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA freq rel ampl lt fr
167. ator output may be accidentally damaged This is because the actual source amplitude may be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the source attenuation is set manually When source attenuation is set to manual SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF source amplitude may be set to values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer capabilities Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output Set the Output Power to Step Automatically SOURce POWer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SOURce POWer STEP AUTO Specifies the source power step size to be one vertical scale division when in logarithmic scale or 10 dB when in linear scale Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Source Amptd Step Auto Man Set the Output Power Step Size SOURce POWer STEP INCRement ampl SOURce POWer STEP INCRement Specifies the source power step size Default Unit dB 306 Chapter5 Language Reference SOURce Subsystem Front Panel Access Source Amptd Step Auto Man Set the Source Sweep Power Range SOURce POWer SWEep rel 1 gt SOURCe POWer SWEep Specifies the range of power levels through which the source output will sweep Use SOURce POWer to set the power level at the start of the power sweep See also SOURce POWer SPAN Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 0 dB to 20 dB Default U
168. attenuation 295 instrument GPIB type 50 preset 326 reset 196 state loading from file 262 state storing 265 status monitoring 196 intensity display angle 235 internal source See tracking generator IP instrument preset 326 L landscape printing 247 Language Reference 189 license key deleting 324 license key entering 324 limit lines adding values 213 amplitude interpolation 209 correction sets delete all 209 define values 211 deleting 213 displaying 213 fixed relative 209 frequency interpolation 211 from memory 261 344 margin size setting 214 margin displaying 214 maximum test 215 on off 215 sorting 207 storing 265 testing 200 testing data 214 type upper lower 215 x axis units 210 line trigger 336 linear scaling 242 linking C C with VTL 97 listener GPIB 50 logarithmic scaling 242 LRN IEEE command 194 M marker list add to 201 markers add to signal list 201 all off 216 bandpower noise off 217 band type set start frequency 225 set stop frequency 226 start frequency 227 stop frequency 227 center frequency 221 commands 216 configure to measure at 258 continuous peaking on off 216 delta 221 frequency span 222 start 222 step size 222 stop 222 frequency counter automatic resolution on off 217 on off 217 query 217 resolution 216 marker table on off 223 measure and add to list 258 NdB bandwidth command 199 on o
169. be defined as ViSession viOpenDefaultRM You must first open a session with the default resource manager with the viOpenDefaultRM function This function will initialize the default resource manager and return a pointer to that resource manager session viOpen This function establishes a communication channel with the device specified A session identifier that can be used with other VTL functions is returned This call must be made for each device you will be using 96 Chapter 3 Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL viPrintf viScanf These are the VTL formatted I O functions that are patterned after those used in the C programming language The viPrintf call sends the SCPI commands to the analyzer The viPrintf call can also be used to query the analyzer The viScanf call is then used to read the results viClose This function must be used to close each session When you close a device session all data structures that had been allocated for the session will be deallocated When you close the default manager session all sessions opened using the default manager session will be closed Linking to VTL Libraries Your application must link to one of the VTL import libraries 32 bit Version assumes Windows 95 operating system C VXIPNP WIN95 LIB MSC VISA32 LIB for Microsoft compilers C VXIPNP WIN95 LIB BC VISA32 L1B for Borland compilers 16 bit Version C VXIPNP WIN LIB MSC VISA LIB for Microsoft compilers
170. ble INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Integrity Uncalibrated Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 316 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range integer to 32767 Questionable Power Condition STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Questionable Power Enable STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle gt This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition Register
171. ce SENSe BANDwidth Subsection SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Resolution Bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution Specifies the resolution bandwidth Example BAND 1 kHz Range 10 Hz to 5 MHz with Option IDR 1 Hz to 5 MHz E7401A E7402A E7403A E7404A E7405A with Option 1D5 Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access BW Avg Resolution BW Auto Man Resolution Bandwidth Automatic SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO 01 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution AUTO Couples the resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST On Example BWID AUTO On History This command function changed with firmware revision A 08 00 With AUTO ON in zero span an error will be generated Remarks Auto couple resolution bandwidth is not available in zero span Resolution Bandwidth Mode SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution MODE EMI SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution MODE Couples the resolution bandwidth to the frequency span in SAN mode to Center Frequency in EMI mode or uncoupled when OFF Factory Preset and RST EMI 272 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe BANDwidth Subsection Video Bandwidth SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo freq SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth VIDeo Specifies the video bandwidth Factory Preset and RST 300 kHz Range 1 Hz to 3 MHz This range is dependent upon the setting of
172. ce manager session You only need to open the default manager session once However subsequent calls to viOpenDefaultRM returns a session to a unique session to the same default resource manager resource Next you open a session with a specific device with the viOpen function This function uses the session returned from viOpenDefaultRM and returns its own session to identify the device session The following shows the function syntax viOpenDefaultRM ses viOpen sesn rsrcName accessMode timeout vi 100 Chapter 3 Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL The session returned from viOpenDefaultRM must be used in the sesn parameter of the viOpen function The viOpen function then uses that session and the device address specified in the resource name parameter to open a device session The vi parameter in viOpen returns a session identifier that can be used with other VTL functions Your program may have several sessions open at the same time by creating multiple session identifiers by calling the viOpen function multiple times The following summarizes the parameters in the previous function calls sesn This is a session returned from the viOpenDefaultRM function that identifies the resource manager session rsrcName This is a unique symbolic name of the device device address accessMode This parameter is not used for VTL Use VI NULL timeout This parameter is not used for VTL Use VI NULL vi This is a
173. ch harmonic amplitude as follows Set the span to 20 MHz SENS FREQ SPAN 20 MHZ Set the center frequency to the desired harmonic SENS FREQ CENT freq Take a sweep and wait for operation complete INIT IMM OPC Perform peak search CALC MARK MAX Set VISA timeout to 60 seconds Activate signal track CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON Zoom down to a 100 kHz span SENS FREQ SPAN 10E4 Take a sweep and wait for operation complete INIT IMM OPC Signal track off CALC MARK TRCK STAT OFF Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds Perform Peak Search CALC MARK MAX Set marker amplitude in volts UNIT POW V 170 vy vf v 7 i 7 i ai i y Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 Query read the marker amplitude in volts CALC MARK Y Change the amplitude units to dBm and read the marker amplitude UNIT POW DBM Calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic reletive to the fundamental Calculate the total harmonic distortion Display the fundamental amplitude in dBm fundamental frequency in MHz relative amplitude of each harmonic in dBc and total harmonic distortion in percent Close the session y ay RR RR RI RI IOI II IOI IOI IOI IOI IO IOI IOI IOI IO I IO ICAO I AO k k kk eek include lt stdio h g
174. commands 235 date format 235 date on off 235 display line amplitude 238 display line on off 238 full screen on off 236 graticule on off 237 hardware configuration 321 intensity angle 235 Index Index number printed per page 247 on off 236 reference level 240 reference level offset 241 reference level normalized 239 reference level position 239 scaling 240 scaling vertical axis 242 signal list parameters 208 system configuration 322 time format 235 time on off 235 title 236 trace 237 units 338 display line subtraction from trace 333 DTR for serial bus 319 dwell time average 288 range 289 setting 288 E EMI detection modes 285 EMI view 286 errors data transfer R S232 53 locate SCPI 323 monitoring 196 querying 322 ESE command description 61 event enable register definition 59 event register definition 59 event status enable 193 enable and read byte 193 register query and clear 194 external trigger 336 delay on off 334 delay value 334 slope 334 F factory defaults 230 factory preset 326 fetch and add features 202 commands 255 commands field descriptions 202 files copy 260 correction table loading 261 correction table storing 264 deleting 261 instrument state loading 262 instrument state storing 265 limit line storing 265 limit lines loading 261 listing 260 measurement results storing 265 moving data 261
175. creen dump or report Remarks This parameter retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Key Access Print Setup Print Screen Report 248 Chapter 5 Language Reference INITiate Subsystem INITiate Subsystem The INITiate subsystem is used to control the initiation of the trigger Refer to the TRIGger and ABORt subsystems for related commands Continuous or Single Measurements INITiate CONTinuous OFF ON 0 1 INITiate CONTinuous Selects whether the trigger system is continuously initiated or not This command affects sweep if not in a measurement and affects trigger when in a measurement A measurement refers to any of the functions under the MEASURE key This corresponds to continuous sweep or single sweep operation when not in a measurement and continuous measurement or single measurement operation when in a measurement When not in a measurement this command does the following When ON at the completion of each sweep cycle the sweep system immediately initiates another sweep cycle When OFF the sweep system remains in an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON oran INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single sweep cycle and then return to the idle state The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer 1 is returned when there is continuous sweeping 0 is returned when there is only a single s
176. cy count state is off then 9e15 is returned Front Panel Access Freq Count Marker Count On Off Frequency Counter Marker Query CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FCOunt X Queries the marker frequency counter Remarks If a frequency count x value is generated when the frequency count state is off then 9e15 is returned Marker Function CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion BPOWer NOISe OFF CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 FUNCtion Selects the marker function for the specified marker To query the value returned by the function use CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 Chapter 5 217 NOTE Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection BPOWer is the power integrated within the bandwidth NOISe is a noise measurement OFF turns off all functions Remarks When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started this command is turned off If this command is turned on when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in progress that measurement will be stopped Front Panel Access Marker Function Marker Peak Maximum Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum Performs a peak search based on the search mode settings of CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE See command CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Meas Tools Peak Search Marker Peak Maximum Left Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum LEFT Places the selected marker on the next highest si
177. d E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4401B strlen hpESA IDN E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4411B strlen hpESA E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models EA4401B 4411 and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn printf Tis ess Press Return to continue n scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main Chapter 3 105 Programming Examples Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion Program Variables ViStatus viStatus double dMarkerFreq double dMarkerAmpl float fPeakExcursion ll long 10 01 Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI_NULL VI_NULL amp ViESA if viStatus printf C
178. d measurement and returns the results in a string format Factory Preset and RST N A Remarks Output format for measurement results of a single signal from the Measure at Marker or Measure at Frequency keys is lt PEAK gt lt QUASI PEAK gt lt AVG gt lt FREQ UNCERTAINTY gt lt TOTAL AMPLITUDE CORRECTION gt lt gt Peak and signal list measurement output is the number of signals measured Configure for Measuring Frequency CONFigure EMI AFRequency lt freq gt lt unit gt MEASure EMI AFRequency lt freq gt lt unit gt Configures for measures a given frequency Factory Preset and RST Not affected by RST or Preset Chapter 5 257 Language Reference MEASure Group of Commands Measure at Marker CONFigure EMI MARKer 1 2 3 4 MEASure EMI MARKer 1 2 3 41 MEASure MARKer Measures at selected marker Loads the internal buffer Factory Preset and RST Not affected by RST or Preset Key Access MEASURE Meas at Marker Measure at Marker and Add to List MEASure EMI MARKer 1 2 3 4 ADD Measures at selected marker and adds to signal list Factory Preset and RST 1 Key Access MEASURE Marker to List Setting Max Min On or Off MEASure EMI MMIN STATe OFF ON 0 1 MEASure EMI MMIN STATe Turns Max Min View On or Off Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Max Min View is active when Max Min On is selected Key Access View Trace More Max Min Max Min
179. d to an interrupt install the handler and enable it vilnstallHandler viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ sSrqHdlr ViAddr 10 viEnableEvent viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ VI_HNDLR VI NULL iSrqOccurred 0 Set the analyzer to a 500 MHz center frequency viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 500 MHZ Mn Set the analyzer to a 100 MHz span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 100 MHZ n Set the analyzer to auto resolution BW viPrintf viESA SENS BAND RES AUTO 1 Set the analyzer to a Auto Sweep Time viPrintf viESA SENS SWE TIME AUTO 1 n Allow analyzer to sweep several times Chapter 3 159 Programming Examples Determine if an Error has Occurred viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 1 Mn Manually couple sweeptime to 5ms reduce resolution BW to 30 KHz Meas Uncal should be displayed on the screen and an interrupt should be generated viPrintf viESA SENS SWE TIME 5 ms Mn viPrintf viESA SENS BAND RES 30 KHZ Wn Wait for SRQ WaitForSRQ Pause for 5 seconds to observe Meas Uncal message on ESA display Sleep 5000 Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is completed or an error message has occurred viPrintf viESA SRE 9641 viPrintf viESA ESE 35 n Send an undefined command to the device viPrintf viESA IDN n Wait for SRQ WaitForSRQ Disable and uninstall the interrupt handler viDisableEvent viES
180. data from the analyzer In other words if a limit line has already been defined changing the type clears the existing limit line Factory Preset and RST Not affected by Preset 210 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Remarks For TIME the limit line segments are placed on the spectrum analyzer display with respect to the sweep time setting of the analyzer with 0 at the left edge of the display For FREQuency segments are placed according to the frequency that is specified for each segment Front Panel Access Display Limits X Axis Units Freq Time Control Limit Line Frequency Interpolation CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear CALCulate LLINe 1 2 CONTrol INTerpolate TYPE Selects the type of interpolation done for the frequency values of the designated limit line when comparing to measured data This only applies in the frequency domain This function does not work in zero span when the analyzer is in the time domain Remarks Once this function is defined the selected type is persistent Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Freq Interp Log Lin Define Limit Line Values CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DATA x axis ampl connected x axis ampl connected CALCulate LLINe 1 2 Defines limit line values and destroys a
181. der the MEASURE key 72 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers The STATus OPERation condition register continuously monitors the hardware and firmware status of the analyzer and is read only To query the register send the STATus OPERation CONDition command The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1 For example if bit number 9 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 512 plus 8 So the decimal value 520 is returned The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the STATus OPERation NTRansition num negative transition command STATus OPERation PTRansition num positive transition command where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The STATus OPERation event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only data Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the STATus OPERation EVENt command The STATus OPERation event enable register lets you choose the bits that will se
182. dition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 318 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem SYSTem Subsystem This subsystem is used to set the controls and parameters associated with the overall system communication These functions are not related to instrument performance GPIB Address SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB 1 SELF ADDRess integer SYSTem COMMunicate GPIB 1 SELF ADDRess Sets and queries the GPIB address This command applies to analyzers having the standard GPIB I O interface Option A4H Only one GPIB I O interface Option A4H can be installed in an instrument Factory Preset and RST It is set to 18 by SYSTem PRESet PERSistent which sets the persistent state values
183. e command STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 77 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable POWer ENABle num Chapter 2 79 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register Figure 2 12 Questionable Status Frequency Register Diagram Source Synth Unlocked Freq Ref Unlocked Reserved Reserved Synth Unlocked Invalid Span or BW Reserved Reserved Reserved Demodulation Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Always Zero 0 QUEStionable Status EREQuency Condition Register 15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210 QUESiomabeStaus y y y y v y y y y y v Y y Y v Y Positive _ 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 32 1 0 Transition Filter auesionvesaus ransition Filter YF YY VETTE TTT TT Event Regie EncbleRegister 15 14 13 12 1110987654321 0 To Questionable Status Register Bit 5 cb910a Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Frequency Condition Register are given in the following table 80 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Source Synth Unlocked A in this bit position indicates that the synthe
184. e fopen C temp ReadTrace32Rs232 txt fprintf fTraceFile ReadTrace32Rs232 exe Output nHewlett Packard 1999 n n fprintf fTraceFile d trace data points of the spectrum n n INumberBytes 4 for long i 0 i lt 1lNumberBytes iBytesPerPnt i fprintf fTraceFile tAmplitude of point d 21 dBm n i 1 dTraceArray 1 fclose fTraceFile Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 134 Chapter 3 Using Limit Lines J F F FEF H H F e He e He k H A III IOI II IOI koe koe koe eek IO I IO ICAO ICAO k k kk eek f Using Limit Lines This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference 7 ay Open a GPIB session at address 18 Clear the analyzer CLR Reset the analyzer RST Set Y Axis Units to dBm UNIT POW DBM Define the upper limit line to have frequency amplitude pairs CALC LLINE1 CONT DOM FREQ CALC LLINE1 TYPE UPP CALC LLINE1 DISP ON CALC LLINE1 DATA freql amp1 1 freq2 amp2 1 Define the lower limit line to have frequency amplitude pairs CALC LLINE2 CONT DOM FREQ
185. e has been turned on Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Limit On Off Select the Type of Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 TYPE UPPer LOWer CALCulate LLINe 1 2 TYPE Sets a limit line to be either an upper or lower type limit line An upper line will be used as the maximum allowable value when comparing with the data A lower limit line defines the minimum value Factory Preset and RST Upper not affected by preset Remarks If a margin has already been set for this limit line and this command is used to change the limit type then the margin value is reset to 0 dB Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Type Upper Lower Chapter 5 215 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection CALCulate MARKer Subsection Markers All Off on All Traces CALCulate MARKer AOFF Turns off all markers on all the traces Front Panel Access Marker Marker All Off Continuous Peaking Marker Function CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 CPEak STATe Turns on or off continuous peaking It continuously puts the selected marker on the highest displayed signal peak Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks This command may not be used to activate a given marker Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Continuous Pk On Off Frequency Counter Marker Resolution CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution real CALCulate MAR
186. e peak search CALC MARK MAX Set the marker to reference level CALC MARK SET RLEV Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM WAI Perform the peak search CALC MARK MAX Change VISA timeout to 60 seconds Activate signal track CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON Perform narrow span and wait SENS FREQ SPAN 10e4 Check for operation complete OPC De activate signal track CALC MARK STAT OFF Chapter 3 7 i f ay 7 id i ay oy v 7 ay d zi ui ay d ay ui EJ v ud v f ay ii 161 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds Set units to dBm UNIT POW DBM Take a sweep and wait for sweep completion INIT IMM OPC Perform the peak search CALC MARK MAX 4 A Read the marker amplitude this is the fundamental Level CALC MARK Y Change the amplitude units to volts UNIT POW V Take a sweep INIT IMM Check for operation complete OPC Read the marker amplitude in volts this is the fundamental amplitude in volts CALC MARK Y Read the marker frequency CALC MARK X Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows Set the span to 20 MHz SENS FREQ SPAN 20 MHZ Set the cent
187. e status bits and the analyzer mode is changed the status bits should be read and any error conditions resolved prior to switching modes Error conditions that exist prior to switching modes cannot be detected using the condition registers after the mode change This is true unless they recur after the mode change although transitions of these conditions can be detected using the event registers Changing modes resets all SCPI status registers and mask registers to their power on defaults Hence any event or condition register masks must be re established after a mode change Also note that the power up status bit is set by any mode change since that is the default state after power up Status Subsystem Commands Individual status registers can be set and queried using the commands in the STATus subsystem in Chapter 5 Language Reference in this guide There are two methods used to programmatically detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer status Either method allows you to monitor one or more conditions The two methods are The Polling Method The Service Request SRQ Method The Polling Method In the polling method the analyzer has a passive role It only tells the controller that conditions have changed when the controller asks the right question The polling method works well if you do not need to know about changes the moment they occur This method is very efficient Use the polling method when eith
188. ead and bus handshaking so minimizing these transactions reduces the time used You can reduce bus transactions by sending multiple commands per transaction See the information on Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line in the SCPI Language Basics section If you are using the pre configured MEASURE key measurements and are making the same measurement multiple times with small changes in the measurement setup use the single READ command It is faster then using INITiate and FETCh 46 Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Avoid unnecessary use of RST Remember that RST presets all the measurements and settings to their factory defaults and my also change the mode This forces you to reset the measurement settings of the analyzer even if they use similar mode setup or measurement settings See Minimize DUT instrument setup changes below Minimize DUT instrument setup changes Some instrument setup parameters are common to multiple measurements You should look at your measurement process with a focus on minimizing setup changes If your test process involves nested loops make sure that the inner most loop is the fastest Also check if the loops could be nested in a different order to reduce the number of parameter changes as you step through the test Are you are using the pre configured Measurements MEASURE key Remember that if you have already set your Meas Setup parameters for a measurement
189. ection UNCertainty COMMent STATe Selection of signal list columns to include in the report PK QP AVG limit1 limit2 correction uncertainty comment Factory Preset and RST Off Select a Signal List to Include in a Report Delta EMI ITEM SLISt DELTa1 DELTa2 PPEak QPEak AVERage STATe ON OFF 1 0 Selects delta from limit line values to include in report For each combination of limit lines 1 and 2 and detectors PPEak QPEak and AVERage this command can be used to include or exclude the delta from the limit for that detector Factory Preset and RST Off Color Hard Copy IMAGe COLor STATe OFF ON 0 1 HCOPy IMAGe COLor STATe Selects between color and monochrome mode for hard copy output Factory Preset and RST The factory default is On This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle 246 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference HCOPy Subsystem Front Panel Access Print Setup Color On Off Print a Hard Copy HCOPy IMMediate The entire screen is output to the parallel port Front Panel Access Print Form Feed the Print Item HCOPy ITEM IMMediate Sends the printer a command to form feed Front Panel Access Print Setup Eject Page Page Orientation HCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait HCOPy PAGE ORIentation Specifies the or
190. ections User Edit PointlFrequencylAmplitudelDelete Point Merge Additional Values into the Existing Amplitude Correction Data SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA MERGe freq rel ampl freq rel ampl Adds the points with the specified values to the current amplitude correction data allowing you to merge correction data If too much data is merged as many points as possible are merged into the existing data and then an error is reported e freq 15 frequency in Hz where the correction should be applied no unit is allowed in this parameter e rel ampl isthe amount of relative amplitude correction in dB needed no unit is allowed in this parameter Remarks CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET CSETI is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSET3 is Other CSET4 is User Chapter 5 277 NOTE Language Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection Delete Amplitude Correction SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DELete Deletes the specified correction set If the set was On it is turned Off Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections AntennalCablelOtherlUser Delete Correction Set Amplitude Correction Frequency Interpolation SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 X SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Sets the frequency interpolation to linear or logarithmic for the specified correction set Remarks Logarithmic frequency scale corrections are linear
191. eep time is re calculated Any limit lines that are on will be turned off For analyzers with firmware revisions prior to A 08 00 Front Panel Access Sweep Points Set Frequency Domain Scale Type SENSe SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SENSe SWEep SPACing Selects either linear or logarithmic for the frequency domain X axis scale The trace query of comma separated values maps frequency amplitude pairs for the mathematical interpolation of the log frequency axis The value of SENSe SWEep POINts is adjusted to reflect the acquisition of data for the given sweep span when log sweep spacing is enabled 298 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection Factory Preset and RST Linear Remarks Refer to the User s Guide for detailed information on the interactions of this command with other functions History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Scale Type Sweep Time SENSe SWEep TIME lt time gt SENSe SWEep TIME Specifies the time in which the instrument sweeps the display Factory Preset and RST 120 8 ms Range The range depends upon the installed options number of sweep points and firmware revision of your instrument See Sweep Time Range in the Specifications Guide for details Default Unit seconds Remarks A span value of 0 Hz causes the analyzer to enter zero span mode In zero span the X axis represents time rather than
192. eference SENSe FREQuency Subsection SENSe FREQuency Subsection Center Frequency SENSe FREQuency CENTer freq SENSe FREQuency CENTer UP DOWN SENSe FREQuency CENTer Set the center frequency In log sweep mode the minimum start frequency is 10 Hz Factory Preset and RST 600 MHz Range EMC E7401A 80 MHz to 1 58 GHz EMC E7402A 80 MHz to 3 10 GHz EMC E7403A 80 MHz to 6 78 GHz EMC E7404A 80 MHz to 13 3 GHz EMC E7405A 80 MHz to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel Center Freq Center Frequency Step Size Automatic SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP AUTO Specifies whether the step size is set automatically based on the span Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access FREQUENCY Channel CF Step Auto Man 1 10 Hz minimum in log sweep mode 290 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe FREQuency Subsection Center Frequency Step Size SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement freq SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP INCRement Specifies the center frequency step size Factory Preset and RST Span 10 Range Maximum negative frequency to the maximum positive frequency listed below E7401A 1 58 to 1 58 GHz E7402A 3 10 to 3 10 GHz 740 6 78 to 6 78 GHz E7404A 13 3 to 13 3 GHz 7405 27 0 to 27 0 GHz Default Unit Hz
193. eger 0 to 127 Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe Front Panel Access File Save State Service Request Enable SRE integer SRE This command sets the value of the service request enable register The query returns the value of the register Range Integer 0 to 255 Read Status Byte Query STB Returns the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents Remarks See CLS 196 Chapter5 Language Reference IEEE Common Commands Trigger TRG This command triggers the instrument Use the TRIGger SEQuence SOURce command to select the trigger source Remarks See also the INITiate IMMediate command Self Test Query TST This query is used by some instruments for a self test For Agilent ESA analyzers TST always returns 0 no tests are performed Front Panel Access System Alignments Align All Now Wait to Continue WAI This command causes the instrument to wait until all pending commands are completed before executing any additional commands There is no query form to the command Chapter 5 197 Language Reference ABORt Subsystem ABORt Subsystem Abort ABORt Restarts any sweep or measurement in progress and resets the sweep or trigger system A measurement refers to any of the measurements found in the MEASURE menu If INITiate CONTinuous is off single measure then INITiate IMMediate will start a new single measuremen
194. elect specific printer characteristics such as the printer language PCL3 or PCL5 and color printing capability Once you have set these characteristics to match those of your connected printer the printer setup process is complete As long as Custom remains selected in the Printer Type menu the analyzer will not attempt to automatically identify the connected printer when the front panel Print key is pressed The Print Setup menu will be displayed with the None key selected and the following message will appear in the display status line Unsupported printer Printer Type set to None This indicates that the analyzer has successfully identified the connected printer but the printer is not supported by the analyzer As long as None is selected in the Printer Type menu the analyzer will respond to any print command by displaying the message Printer Type is None in display status line Chapter 1 55 Programming Fundamentals Printer Setup and Operation Testing Printer Operation When you have completed the printer setup for the analyzer press Print Setup Print Screen and then press Print on the front panel If the printer is ready and the printer setup was successful a printout of the analyzer display will be printed If the printer is not ready the message Printer Timeout will appear on the analyzer display Printer Timeout will remain on the display until the printer is ready or until you press ESC to cancel the printout re
195. em The DISPlay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual graphical and trace information Within a display information may be separated into individual windows Display Viewing Angle DISPlay ANGLe integer DISPlay ANGLe Changes the viewing angle for better viewing in different environments Factory Preset and RST The factory default is 4 This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Integer 1 to 7 Front Panel Access Viewing angle keys Date and Time Display Format DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat MDY DMY DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk DATE FORMat Allows you to set the format for displaying the real time clock To set the date time use SYSTem DATE year month day Factory Preset and RST The factory default is MDY This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access System Time Date Date Format MDY DMY Date and Time Display DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk STATe 01 DISPlay ANNotation CLOCk STATe Turns on and off the display of the date and time on the spectrum analyzer screen Chapter 5 235 Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem Factory Preset and RST The factory default is On This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a
196. em commands used for measurements in the MEASURE and Meas Setup menus may only be used to set parameters of a specific measurement when the measurement is active Otherwise an error will occur You must first select the appropriate measurement using CONFigure measurement command Ifa SENSe command is used to change a parameter during a measurement while not in its idle state the measurement will be restarted 268 Chapter 5 NOTE Language Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection SENSe AVERage Subsection Clear the Current Average SENSe AVERage CLEar Re start the trace averaging function Re start the trace at the beginning of a sweep to obtain valid average data To do this remotely abort the sweep and initiate a single sweep Set the Average Count SENSe AVERage COUNt integer SENSe AVERage COUNt Specifies the number of measurements that are combined Factory Preset and RST 100 Range 1 to 8192 Front Panel Access BW Avg Average On Off Turn Averaging On Off SENSe AVERage STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe AVERage STATe This command toggles averaging off and on Averaging combines the value of successive measurements to average out measurement variations Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks When a measurement under the front panel MEASURE key is started this command is turned off for video averaging SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo If this command is tur
197. ent ex cue eds d p 230 Align Demaodulatfi 230 Query the Internal or External Frequency Reference 2 0 230 Coarse Adjust the Frequency Reference 231 Fine Adjust the Fregueney Referenc pA EN veer E EK REFERS 231 ad doo IP EROR eae ne Lee UR ORA o neces 231 Alien tie 231 Select the Source State QUO Vade os tardo e Kod fa 232 Calibrate the racking Generator 232 SUEDE 233 COUPIe the Function to Other Settings 233 DISFlay Saby 2 2 b hhenP ti dence che sa sidecases 235 Lene Ve AMIG 95 EeR tI ERI DC ieee RERV SQUE A d A d 235 Contents 10 Dateand Time Display Format coh eee Sieh ERROR FREE ERE OHIO 235 Date and Time DESDE 235 Display Annotation THIS Data eseri oh ide REO E ER EES EG UR n deb RIY 236 the Entire Display OMOT 222 c4cd ened casted ds bad oe ba 144 ES RES PA RA 236 Turn the Pull Screen Display hones ese enesee EE RAE datt 236 boo Po 00r 237 Trace Graticule Display Cb eRRETIARASRR IU bxARARNRe Eee 237 TE X SUE SOR CHDE 2 aii p oda fee
198. ently selected source power units Front Panel Access Source Amptd Offset Source Attenuation SOURCe POWer ATTenuation lt 1 gt SOURce POWer ATTenuation Attenuates the source output level Specifically setting SOURce POWer ATTenuation lt amp1 gt sets the mode to manual SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF When source attenuation is set to manual SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF source amplitude may be set to values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer capabilities Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output Factory Preset and RST EMC E7401A 0 dB EMC E7402A 8 dB EMC E7403A 8 dB EMC E7404A 8 dB Chapter 5 303 CAUTION Language Reference SOURce Subsystem EMC E7405A 8 dB Range EMC E7401A 0 dB to 60 dB in 10 dB steps EMC E7402A 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps EMC E7403A 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps EMC E7404A 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps EMC 7405 0 dB to 56 dB in 8 dB steps Default Unit dB Front Panel Access Source Attenuation Auto Man Automatic Source Attenuation SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO Selects if the source output level attenuator will be set automatically or manually Power level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged This is because the actual source amplitude may be
199. ents Align Now RF Select the Source State for Calibration CALibration SOURce STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALibration SOURce STATe Controls the state of the 50 MHz alignment signal The alignment signal is internally switched to the INPUT for Agilent model E7401A For all other models connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector before performing a calibration Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access For Agilent EMC model E7401A Input Output or Input Amptd Ref f 50 MHz On Off For all other Agilent EMC models Input Output or Input Amptd Ref Out f 50 MHz On Off Calibrate the Tracking Generator CALibration TG CALibration TG Performs an alignment of the tracking generator assembly The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful This command is applicable on all Agilent EMC models except E7401A with Option 1DN installed Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector RF OUT and the INPUT connector The alignment will fail using command CAL TG if the cable is not connected Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now TG 232 Chapter5 Language Reference COUPIe Subsystem COUPIle Subsystem Some measurement settings are automatically coupled together to optimize speed and accuracy These commands control that coupling COUPIe the Function to Other Settings COUPle ALL NONE COUPle
200. ep Cont Single Single Meas Control Measure Cont Single Abort Measurement INITiate ABort This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to abort the current measurement Remarks This command is equivalent of sending an ABORt command followed by an INITiate IMMediate command Front Panel Access Meas Control Abort Pause the Measurement INITiate PAUSe This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to pause the current measurement by changing the current measurement state from the wait for trigger state to the paused state If the measurement is not in the wait for trigger state when the command is issued the transition will be made the next time that state is entered as part of the trigger cycle When in the pause state the analyzer auto align process stops If the analyzer is paused for a long period of time measurement accuracy may degrade Remarks Only applies to auto measure 250 Chapter5 Language Reference INITiate Subsystem Front Panel Access Meas Control Pause Restart the Measurement INITiate RESTart This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to restart the present measurement from the idle state regardless of its operating state It is equivalent to INITiate IMMediate for single measurement mode or ABORt for continuous measurement mode Front Panel Access Res
201. epare ESA for measurement KKK K K K K eee K void setup viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 1 MHz n iCenter viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 901 MHZ n iSpan viPrintf viESA SENS BAND 1 KHZ n iRbw use the sampling detector for power average calculations viPrintf viESA DET SAMP n Turn off analog output of option board to maximize measurement rate viPrintf viESA SYST PORT IFVS ENAB OFF n Turn auto align off to maximize measurement rate viPrintf viESA CAL AUTO OFF n set requested number of points viPrintf viESA SWE POINTS i n NUM POINTS printf This program will measure and calculate n printf the power average of 1 i point traces n iNumTraces iNumPoints Turn on 50 MHz amplitude reference signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON n Identify the instrument and get the model number viQueryf viESA IDN n St amp cBuffer iResult strncmp cBuffer hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cBuffer hpESA E4411B strlen hpESA E4411B amp amp strncmp cBuffer E7401A strlen hpEMC 7401 if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models 4401 E4411B and E7401A 180 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements viPrintf viESA DISP WIN
202. epebo Gk Re RO EROR ACER RUE 318 STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRanation i zsekasseh Fob eRe ee ORES HOSES AG ERR Y 318 STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition lt integer gt 0 65 ce eee eee eee e ehe 318 iS TAEus OUESGonable POWerPTRSDRSOU3IDDP Rene Eabod Gaede ee eRe 318 QUBStionable POWer EVENE REE ED RE RES 317 STATus QUESnDonable PTRansition lt iNteg r gt ERU RC EE RSS 318 STATus QUEStIonable PTRangsitiot 318 ISTATDWOUBSGOnAble BVENIE E PE RR ERROR PR RS Hae CRURA 312 SYSTem COMMunicate GPis 1 SELF ADDRess a keke GO 319 SYS lens OMMunicate GPIB SEEPIEADDRSSS tema pk diese SHEER dE RE RR eR 319 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol DTR OFFIONIIBFull 00 000 319 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol DTR 4 4065 ccs ced ede beau baer hn xem Rh 319 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol RTS OFFIONIIBFull 0 0 00 cece eee eee 320 Sy S len COMMunicate IECONTIOERTS na ee 320 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE XONINONE 0c e ee eee eee 321 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 TRANsmit PACE ee 321 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive BAUD baud rate 0 0 0 0 eee 320 SYS len CONIMunicate SERIal T RECeive Pines Er rA er AN 320 SYSTem CO
203. eq gt rel ampl foran explanation of correction factors Test Current Trace Data Against all Limit Lines CALCulate CLIMits FAIL Queries the status of the limit line testing Returns a 0 if the trace data passes when compared with all the current limit lines Returns a 1 if the trace data fails any limit line test 200 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection Add Measure to List CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD MEASured Adds results of most recent measure to marker list Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Front Panel Access MEASURE Meas to List Add Marker to List CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD MARKer 1 2 3 4 Adds marker frequency and amplitude to signal list Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Front Panel Access MEASURE Marker to List Append Signal Data to List CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD lt string gt and CALCulate EMI SLISt FETCH CURRent lt integer gt Adds data to signal list using the defined format The string is a data string formatted as a quote delimited string with comma separated fields Data Format The string is a quoted delimited string with comma separated fields The meaning of a value is determined by its position in the data string The data format string is designed to allow complementary use between the ADD and FETCH features That is the output of the FETCH command is directly usable as input to the ADD command
204. equency Span in MHz iCenter CENTER Analyzer Center frequency in MHz mf int iResult 0 unsigned long lRetCount the number of bytes transferred in one trace record double dTimePer dPower struct timeb start time stop time elapsed time char cCommand 100 char cBuffer 100 char cEnter double dPwrAvgArray MAX POINTS ViUInt32 iHeaderLength header is nyyy n is number of chars in yyy ag yyy is the total data length in bytes iArrayLength iArrayLength is number of bytes of data wy iTermLength 1 the response message includes a LF character af iBlockSize number of bytes expected in one trace definite block iTotalRetCount total number of bytes actually transferred ay ViSession defaultRM viESA reserve space for the header data and terminator ViChar cInBuffer sizeof 1 MAX POINTS DATA LENGTH 1 ViChar cOutBuffer sizeof TRAC DATA TRACE2 nyyyyl MAX POINTS DATA LENGTH d KKK KKK KKK Calculate length byte in block header FR AI AI A int HeaderLength int iArrayLength int iHeaderLength Chapter 3 179 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements iHeaderLength 3 iArrayLength gt 0 plus increment for 4 and n xf while iArrayLength iArrayLength 10 gt 0 iHeaderLength return iHeaderLength JEE H e ke e h e he he de He ek pr
205. er your programming language development environment does not support SRQ interrupts you want to write a simple single purpose program and don t want the added complexity of setting up an SRQ handler The Service Request SRQ Method The SRQ method allows timely communication of information without requiring continuous controller involvement Using this method the analyzer takes a more active role It tells the controller when there has been a condition change without the controller asking The SRQ method should be used if you must know immediately when a condition changes This is in contrast to the polling method which requires the program to repeatedly read the registers to detect a change 62 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Use the SRQ method when either you need time critical notification of changes you are monitoring more than one device which supports SRQs you need to have the controller do something else while the analyzer is making a measurement you can t afford the performance penalty inherent to polling Using the Service Request SRQ Method Your language bus and programming environment must be able to support SRQ interrupts for example using C and C with the GPIB When you monitor a condition with the SRQ method you must establish the following parameters 1 Determine which bit monitors the condition 2 D
206. er on page 77 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated ENABle lt num gt 88 Chapter 2 Figure 2 15 To Status Questionable Register Bit 9 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable INTegrity Register Questionable Status Integrity Register Diagram Reserved Reserved Reserved Data Uncalibrated Summary IF ADC Over Range Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Invalid Data Reserved Reserved Always Zero 0 Status QUEStionable ety Con Status QUEStionable y V v Y v v Vv v Y Y YN INTegrity Positive 15 14 13 12111098 76543210 T ition Fil Status aUEStionableW Y Y Y Y V3 YY VY 3 VV 33 15 14 13 12 11 10 987 654 3 2 T ition Fil Status QUEStionable Y Y Y Y egrity Event Register l1 I I I I Status QUEStionable LI TT T T 1 Event 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Enable Register ition Register 15 14 13 12 11 10987654 321 0 cl720a Bit descriptions in the Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register are given in the following table Chapter 2 89 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description
207. er GPIB 50 copy trace command 328 correction amplitude deleting 276 deleting correction set 278 merging data 277 on off 276 setting correction set 278 setting data 276 turning set on off 278 constant default 230 external amplifier 279 frequency 200 impedance mismatch 279 internal tracking generator 303 set amplitude deleting 278 set amplitude setting 278 corrections table loading from file 261 corrections table storing 264 coupling ac dc 252 coupling none manual all automatic 233 cursor to signal list 207 custom printer 245 342 D data append to list 201 exchange trace 329 format numeric 243 limit line merging 213 mean of trace 330 moving to file 261 placing in output buffer 255 testing against limit line 214 trace normalize 228 transferring trace 328 date display format 235 display on off 235 setting 322 dc input coupling command 252 defaults preset 326 defaults setting 254 delay time demodulation 281 gate trigger to open 300 delta markers 219 demodulation 280 displaying signal 281 on off 281 squelch 280 time 281 type AM FM 280 detection type auto on off 282 detection type EMI modes 285 selecting 284 detector ranging 286 detector restore previous settings 286 diagnostic commands 229 directories creating 263 deleting 264 of memory disk 260 display angle 235 annotation on off 237 auto ranging on off 238
208. er frequency to the desired harmonic SENS FREQ CENT freq Take a sweep and wait for operation complete INIT IMM OPC Perform peak search CALC MARK MAX Set VISA timeout to 60 seconds Activate signal track CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON Zoom down to a 100 kHz span SENS FREQ SPAN 10E4 Take a sweep and wait for operation complete INIT IMM OPC Signal track off CALC MARK TRCK STAT OFF Reset VISA timeout to 3 seconds Perform Peak Search CALC MARK MAX Set marker amplitude in volts UNIT POW V 162 vy vf v 7 i 7 i ai i y Chapter 3 Query read the marker amplitude in volts CALC MARK Y Change the amplitude units to dBm and read the marker amplitude UNIT POW DBM Calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic reletive to the fundamental Calculate the total harmonic distortion Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB ay n Display the fundamental amplitude in dBm fundamental frequency in MHz relative amplitude of each harmonic in dBc and total harmonic distortion in percent Close the session y ay RR RR RI RI IOI II IOI IOI IOI IOI IO IOI IOI IOI IO I IO ICAO I AO k k kk eek include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio
209. er trace firmware revision A 04 00 and later For firmware revisions prior to A 04 00 the number of sweep points is 401 iSwpPnts 401 viQueryf viESA SENSE SWEEP POINTS n d amp iSwpPnts Calculate number of bytes in the header The header consists of the sign followed by a digit representing the number of digits to follow The digits which follow represent the number of sweep points multiplied by the number of bytes per point iHeaderBytes 3 iDataBytes gt 3 plus increment for and n 122 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB iDataBytes iSwpPnts iBytesPerPnt lNumberBytes iDataBytes while iDataBytes iDataBytes 10 0 iHeaderBytes Set analyzer to single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Mn Set the analyzer to 50MHz center frequency viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ n Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHZWM Specify dB per division of each vertical division and Units viPrintf viESA DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 10dB n viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Set analyzer trace data format to 32 bit Real viPrintf viESA FORM DATA REAL 32 Set the binary byte order to SWAP viPrintf viESA FORM BORD SWAP n Trigger a sweep and wait for sweep to complete viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAINn Calc
210. er trigger event handler Vistatus VI FUNCH mySrqHdlr ViSession viESA ViEventType eventType ViEvent ctx ViAddr userHdlr ViUIntl6 iStatusByte Chapter 3 151 Programming Examples Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done Make sure it is an SRQ event ignore if stray event if eventType VI EVENT SERVICE REQ printf n Stray event type0x 1x n eventType Return successfully return VI_SUCCESS When an interrupt occurs determine which device generated the interrupt if an instrument other than the ESA generates the interrupt simply report Instrument at GPIB Address xxx Has Generated an Interrupt printf n n SRQ event occurred n printf Original Device Session t n vViESA Get the GPIB address of the insrument which has interrupted viQueryf viESA SYST COMM GPIB SELF ADDR n t cBuf printf Instrument at GPIB address s has generated an interrupt n cBuf Get the status byte If the ESA generated the interrupt determine the nature of the interrupt did the measurement complete or an error message occur viQueryf viESA ESR n Sd amp iStatusByte if 0x01 amp iStatusByte printf Nn SRQ message t Measurement complete n else if 0x02 0x10 0x20 amp iStatusByte printf n SRQ message t Error Message Occurred n Return successfully iSrqOccurred 1 viReadSTB viESA amp iS
211. etermine how that bit reports to the request service RQS bit of the status byte 3 Send GPIB commands to enable the bits that monitor the condition and to enable the summary bits that report the condition to the RQS bit 4 Enable the controller to respond to service requests When the condition changes the analyzer sets the RQS bit and the GPIB SRQ line The controller is informed of the change as soon as it occurs The time the controller would otherwise have used to monitor the condition can now be used to perform other tasks Your program also determines how the controller responds to the SRQ Generating a Service Request Before using the SRQ method of generating a service request first become familiar with how service requests are generated Bit 6 of the status byte register is the request service summary RQS bit The RQS bit is set whenever there is a change in the register bit that it has been configured to monitor The RQS bit will remain set until the condition that caused it is cleared It can be queried without erasing the contents using the STB command Configure the RQS function using the SRE command When a register set causes a summary bit in the status byte to change from 0 to 1 the analyzer can initiate the service request SRQ process However the process is only initiated if both of the following conditions are true The corresponding bit of the service request enable register is also set to 1 e The analyzer
212. ets the hardware pacing hand shaking scheme Many high speed asynchronous modems use this line paired with CTS as receive transmit pacing Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument Off indicates that the RTS line should always be asserted On indicates that the RTS line should always be unasserted IBFull selects the input buffer full mode for the RTS line IBFull sets the RTS line to indicate when the device is ready to receive When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold the device will unassert the RTS line When the number of bytes has been reduced to the start threshold the device will assert RTS indicating that it can receive input again RTS is sometimes called RFR ready for receiving The device will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if that line becomes unasserted Factory Preset no RST The factory default is IBFull This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Serial Port Baud Rate Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive BAUD baud rate SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 RECeive BAUD Only one Option 1 AX can be installed in an instrument Factory Preset no RST The factory default is 9600 This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Supported baud rates are
213. ets the time out to infinite for this specified session viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE VI INFINITE printf Nt Performing first self alignment ys Initiate a self alignment viPrintf viESA CAL ALLMn Query for operation complete viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp lOpc printf n n t First Self Alignment is Done if 10pc printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 printf n n t Press Return to continue with next alignment n n scanf c amp cEnter printf Nt Performing next self alignment N sys Query for self alignment results viQueryf viESA CAL ALL n d amp lResult if lResult printf n n t Self alignment Failed Wn else printf n n t Self alignment Passed Query for operation complete viQueryf viESA OPC n amp 10 if 10pc 114 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Performing Internal Self alignment printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM Chapter 3 115 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB e I He I RI e He IK IKI IKI IK IIR IORI e k IO I eee eee ex f
214. f 30 Commands Alphabetical Listing TX PES Lau dte kd beaiiezbeseasenieexehuq dk seks pb qitod ibd ip eee 271 GENSSEAVERageE STATS aeRO ERE OSES REO do REO HET HEC 269 Lia ax RE ERR HHER V adeR e HC qae Roane ROSES REX CE REGE RII PORA ERA 269 TYPE check ERR REA RE kE Rr 219 SENS BANDY TYPE ATER RS 213 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo freq lesse FAX SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo AUTO III 273 D SENSSIEBANDwiIdtblIBWIDtb zi SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo RATio lt gt 213 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth VIDeo RATio AUTO OFFIONIOI 2 0 0 0 RR 2 SENSe BANDwidthlBWIDth VIDeo RATio een hrs 273 SENSSE BANDwidthlBWIDth VIDeo RATIO RE ee headed ade AER RA EE 273 22254085084 555 44 ee het HESS eR ad SENSe EBANDwidthlBWIDth RESolution freq kx ek to 272 SENSe BANDwidthlBWIDth RESolution AUTO OFFIONIOIT 0 0 0 0 0 00 cee 22 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth RESolution AUTO rn 272 D SENSe BANDwidthlBWIDth RESolution MODE EMIISANIOFF seeeseee ee 272 SENSe BANDwidthIBWIDth RESolution MODE cece eee eee eee terra 22 4 osse uere
215. f second trace TRACE2 MODE VIEW Enable local display for viewing DISP ENAB ON Select continuous sweep mode INIT CONT ON Close session and Return instrument to local control 4 A ui wi d vy vf BRR RK RK RR RK RRR KKK KKK KR RIK KK KK IKK KK KE KK KEK KE RRR EK RK include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt math h gt include lt sys timeb h gt include lt visa h gt define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A define NUM TRACES 100 number of traces to average define NUM POINTS 401 requested number of points trace define CENTER 50 define SPAN 20 define RBW 300 define DISPLAY 0 define DATA LENGTH 4 number of data bytes in one trace point uA define MAX POINTS 8192 maximum number of points trace in ESA 178 center frequency in MHz an integer span frequency in MHz an integer resolution BW in kHz an integer ESA display enable disable for speed rd Chapter 3 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements int iNumTraces NUM TRACES number of traces to average iRbw RBW resolution bandwidth iNumPoints NUM POINTS actual number of trace points per sweep ui iSpan SPAN Analyzer Fr
216. ff 222 peak search define 220 left 218 minimum 219 next 218 perform 218 right 219 peak definition of 220 peak threshold 221 Index Index peak to peak 221 reference level 221 span pair 224 225 span type set values 226 trace assignment 223 trace assignment auto 223 tracking signal 223 type 219 x axis location 224 x axis readout 226 y axis query 227 marks clear all 204 max hold trace 333 max min view on off 258 select max 258 maximum power to mixer 296 mean of trace data 330 measurement abort 250 at marker and add to list 258 bandwidth command 200 commands 254 255 control of 249 frequency 257 increasing speed 45 input signal 268 marker configuration 258 pause 250 peaks 259 restart 251 results storing 265 resume 251 return results of last 257 single continuous 249 259 stopping 254 trigger 250 min hold trace 333 mixer maximum input power 296 monitoring errors 196 monitoring status 196 N NdB bandwidth command 199 NdB command 199 NdBstate command 200 negative peak detection 284 negative transition register definition 59 noise marker 217 normal marker 219 normalize on off 228 normalized referencel level position 239 offsets trigger 335 OPC command description 61 operation complete command IEEE command 195 operation event query 308 options query 195 324 options IEEE command 195 outputs configuration
217. ff hpESA IDN E4411B strlen hpESA IDN E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4401B 4411 amd E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Prantl Press Return to continue scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main 142 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Noise Program Variables ViStatus viStatus 0 double dMarkAmp 20 0 long 10 01 Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp ViESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the Instrument viClear viESA Reset the Instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Noise Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50e6 n Set the analyzer sp
218. form a peak search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Read the marker amplitude this is the fundamental amplitude in dBm viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n 1 amp fFundaAmptdDbm Change the amplitude units to Volts viPrintf viESA UNIT POW Vin Read the marker amplitude in volts This is the fundamental amplitude in Volts necessary for the THD calculation viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y Mn 1f amp dFundaAmptdV 174 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 Read the marker frequency viQueryf viESA CALC MARK X WMn 1f amp dMarkerFreq dFundamental dMarkerFreq Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows for 1Num 2 1Num lt 1MaxHarmonic 1Num Measuring the Harmonic No d message printf n t Measuring the Harmonic d n 1Num Set the span to 20 MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 20 MHZ n Set the center frequency to the nominal harmonic frquency dHarmFreq lNum dFundamental viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 1 HZ n dHarmFreq Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep Perform a peak search and wait for completion viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Increase timeout to 60 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI ATTR VALUE 60000 Activate signal track viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON n Zoom down to a 100 KHz span
219. frequency In this mode the sweep time may be set to faster values when Option AYX is installed Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Time Auto Man Automatic Sweep Time SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO Automatically selects the fastest sweep time for the current settings Factory Preset and RST On History This command function changed with firmware revision A 08 00 With AUTO ON in zero span an error will be generated Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Time Auto Man Chapter 5 299 Language Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection Sweep Time Mode SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO MODE SRESponse SANalyzer SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO MODE Specifies the type of automatic coupling for the fastest sweep time at the current settings Stimulus response Spectrum analyzer Factory Preset and RST SANalyzer Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Coupling SR SA Time Gating Delay Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay lt time gt SENSe SWEep TIME GATE DELay Sets the delay time from when the gate trigger occurs to when the gate opens This is for EDGE triggering only Factory Preset and RST 1 us Range 0 3 us to 429 seconds Default Unit seconds Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Setup Edge Setup Gate Delay Time Gate Length Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LENGth time SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LENGth Specifies the gate time length in sec
220. given by the user viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ STAR 1f MHZ SENS FREQ STOP 1f MHZ n dStartFreq dStopFreq Trigger a sweep wait for completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI n Set the marker to the maximum peak 110 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Set the analyzer to activate delta marker mode viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MODE DELT n Trigger a sweep wait for completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAINn Set the marker to minimum amplitude viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MIN n Query and read the marker amplitude viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y WMn 1f amp dMarkerAmplitude print the marker amplitude printf n n tRESULT Marker Amplitude Delta 1 dB n n dMarkerAmplitude Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM Chapter 3 111 Programming Examples Performing Internal Self alignment Performing Internal Self alignment J F RR HR ke A He I FO I e He IK IK IK IO k IO I I ex f Performing Internal Self alignment This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This example shows two ways of executing an internal self alignment The first demonstrates using the OPC q
221. gnal peak to the left of the current marked peak Remarks The marker will be placed at the next highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error 202 is given Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Next Pk Left Marker Next Peak Maximum Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum NEXT Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak from the current marked peak Remarks The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error 202 is given 218 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Next Peak Marker Peak Maximum Right Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MAXimum RIGHt Places the selected marker on the next highest signal peak to the right of the current marked peak Remarks The marker will be placed at the highest peak that rises and falls by at least the peak excursion above the peak threshold If no peak meets the excursion and threshold criteria a No Peak Found error 202 is given Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search Next Pk Right Marker Peak Minimum Search CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 MINimum Places the selected marker on the lowest point on the trace
222. greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the source attenuation is set manually When source attenuation is set to manual SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF source amplitude may be set to values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer capabilities Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device to the tracking generator output Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access Source Attenuation Auto Man Sets the Output Power SOURCe POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt ampl gt SOURce POWer LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UP DOWN SOURce POWer LEVe1 IMMediate AMPLitude Specifies the source output power level Use SOURce POWer SWEep to set change in power level across the sweep Also see SOURce POWer STARt and OUTPut STATe 304 Chapter5 CAUTION Language Reference SOURce Subsystem Power level sensitive devices connected to the tracking generator output may be accidentally damaged This is because the actual source amplitude may be greater than the amplitude indicated on the analyzer when the source attenuation is set manually When source attenuation is set to manual SOURce POWer ATTenuation AUTO OFF source amplitude may be set to values beyond actual output levels to accommodate the full range of analyzer capabilities Therefore exercise caution when connecting a power level sensitive device
223. guage reference in the SYSTem subsystem under SYSTem OPTions Recall RCL register This command recalls the instrument state from the specified instrument memory register Range Registers are an integer 0 to 127 Remarks See also commands MMEMory LOAD STATe and MMEMory STORe STATe If the state being loaded has a newer firmware revision than the revision of the instrument no state is recalled and an error is reported If the state being loaded has an equal firmware revision than the revision of the instrument the state will be loaded If the state being loaded has an older firmware revision than the revision of the instrument the instrument will only load the parts of the state that apply to the older revision Chapter 5 195 NOTE Language Reference IEEE Common Commands Front Panel Access File Recall State Reset RST This command presets the instrument to a factory defined condition that is appropriate for remote programming operation RST is equivalent to performing the two commands SYSTem PRESet and CLS This command always performs a factory preset The preset performed by RST is always a factory preset That is the same preset performed by SYSTem PRESet when SYSTem PRESet TYPE is set to FACTory Front Panel Access Preset Save SAV lt register gt This command saves the instrument state to the specified instrument memory register Range Registers are an int
224. h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B ddefinehpEMC E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 long lOpc 01 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4411B strlen hpESA E4411B strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4401B E4411B and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn Chapter 3 163 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB else For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn Printi Press Return to continue Mn scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void TakeSweep Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM n viQueryf viESA O
225. h h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard define hpEMC_IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard Chapter 3 4401 4411 E7401A 145 Programming Examples Entering Amplitude Correction Data ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4401B strlen hpESA IDN E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4411B strlen hpESA IDN E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC E7401A strlen hpEMC 7401 if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models 4401 4411 and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT n printf Press Return to continue Mn scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main Program Variables ViChar VI FAR cResult 1024 0 ViReal64 VI FAR aRealArray 2 100 0
226. hat types of scalar results or trace data results are available Measure Commands MEASure lt measurement gt n MEASure commands stop the present measurement and set up the instrument for the specified measurement using the factory default values Other SCPI communication is blocked until the measurement is complete After the data is valid the scalar result is returned for the specified measurement These are the settings and units that conform to the measurement specific standard Stops the current measurement and sets up the instrument for the specified measurement using the factory defaults Initiates the data acquisition for the measurement Blocks other SCPI communication waiting until the measurement is complete before returning results Turns the averaging function on and sets the number of averages to the default number of averages for the measurement typically this is 10 e After the data is valid it returns the scalar results or the trace data for the specified measurement If the optional n value is not included or is set to 1 the scalar measurement results will be returned If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available If you need to change some of the measurement parameters from the factory default settings you can set up the measurement with the CONF
227. he current parameter Default is current ALL all signals 206 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection CURRent current signal TOEnd from the current signal to the end of the list DUPLicates all duplicate signals LOWer all lower amplitude duplicates COMPlement complement signals Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal List Signal Marking Mark Signal Position Cursor to Signal List CALCulate EMI SLISt SELect FIRSt LAST NEXT PREVious integer Position cursor to signal in list Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks Once this function is defined Signal List On the cursor is positioned and the selected state is persistent Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle This command takes a signal index value which corresponds to the position of a signal in the signal list Valid range is 1 to 2000 Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal List Signal List Specify Sort Key CALCulate EMI SLISt SORT FREQuency PEAK OPEak AVERage LLINE1 LLINE2 ASCending DESending CALCulate EMI SLISt SORT FREQ ASC Specifies the sort key and order for signal list sorting Both the sort and order are required The format is comma separated Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal List Sort Signals By
228. he following command subsystems SENSe lt measurement gt SENSe CHANnel SENSe CORRection SENSe FREQuency SENSe POWer CALCulate lt measurement gt CALCulate CLIMits DATA DISPlay lt measurement gt TRIGger Configure Commands CONFigure lt gt This command stops current measurement and sets up instrument for specified measurement using the factory default instrument settings It does not initiate the taking of measurement data This command also turns the averaging function on and sets the number of averages to 10 for all measurements The query CONFigure returns the current measurement name in quotes The CONFigure query returns the current measurement name 254 Chapter5 Language Reference MEASure Group of Commands Fetch Commands FETCh measurement n This command puts valid data into the output buffer but does not initiate data acquisition Use the INITiate IMMediate command to acquire data before you use the FETCh command You can only fetch results from the measurement that is currently selected FETCh meas will return valid data only when the measurement is in one of the following states idle initiated paused If the optional n value is not included or is set to 1 the scalar measurement results will be returned If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of w
229. he uncertainty for a signal may be entered for a signal If not provided the default value for the instrument is applied to the signal The uncertainty may be entered in Hz or engineering notation FETCH The uncertainly is returned in Hz Total Correction ADD The total correction factor may be entered in integer or engineering format The units are mdB FETCH The total correction factor is returned in mdB Mark ADD The signal may be marked during the ADD process by setting this flag to 1 or On It may also be explicitly turned Off or 0 FETCH The signal mark is returned as a 1 On or 0 Off Peak Quasi Peak and Average Detector Amplitude Flags ADD The presence of an amplitude number in the add string automatically turns on the amplitude flag for that detector That value may be overridden by explicitly setting the detector to 0 or Off FETCH The detector flag is returned as a 1 On or 0 Off Comment ADD The comment is a single line of text with a maximum length of 31 characters Characters in excess of 31 are truncated FETCH The comment is returned in the 11th position and delimited by commas Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Clear Marks CALCulate EMI SLISt CLEar ALL CURRent lt integer gt Clears marks on all current or specific signals Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks This command takes an lt integer gt value which corresponds to the position of a s
230. his bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 14 16384 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 15 32768 Always Zero 0 Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers The Questionable Status Power Condition Register continuously monitors output power status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable POWer CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition lt num gt negative transition or STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Power Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send th
231. how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle lt num gt Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition and Event Enable Registers The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated NTRansition num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Regist
232. iESA viClose defaultRM 148 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done BRR RRR KR KK RK KK RR RK RRR RRR RK RRR KK RR KR KK eee Status Register Determine when a measurement is done This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Resets the Analyzer RST Clears the analyzer status byte CLS Sets the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Route the amplitude reference to the analyzer input CAL SOUR STAT ON Set the analyzer center frequency span and Res BW SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHz SENS FREQ SPAN 10 MHz SENS BAND RES 300 kHz Trigger a sweep and wait for completion of sweep INIT IMM OPC Sets the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error message has occurred SRE 96 ESE 35 Set the computer to response to an interrupt Send an undefined command to the ESA IDN illegal command Wait for the SRQ When an interrupt occurs poll all instruments Report the nature of the inter
233. icates which SCPI command was executing when the error occurred and what about that command was unacceptable error number error message annotated SCPI command The maximum length of the annotated SCPI command is 80 characters If the error occurs in a SCPI command longer than 80 characters the lt Err gt sentinel is placed at the end of the annotated SCPI command Example First set SYST ERR VERBose ON If the command SENSe FREQuently CENTer 942 6MHz is sent then sending SYST ERR returns 113 Undefined header SENSe FREQuently Err CENTer 942 6MHz lt NL gt The lt Err gt shown after FREQuently shows you the spelling error The lt NL gt is the typical representation for the command terminator If the command SENSe FREQ CENTer 942 6Sec is sent then sending SYST ERR returns 131 Invalid suffix SENSe FREQuency CENTer 942 6Sec Err lt NL gt The lt Err gt shown after Sec shows you the invalid suffix Factory Preset and RST Not affected by RST Remarks The verbose SCPI error debugging state is global to all the SCPI interfaces History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access System Show Errors Verbose SCPI ON OFF Host Identification Query SYSTem HID This command returns a string that contains the host identification This ID is required in order to obtain the license key that enables a new application or option Front Panel Access Sy
234. ication any demand upon instrument resources affects measurement update rate When auto alignment is off the Align Now All function should be performed periodically Refer to the appropriate Specifications and Characteristics chapter in the Agilent Technologies EMC Analyzers Specifications Guide for more information on how often to perform Align Now All when the auto alignment is off Use a fixed IF Gain range In applications where narrow resolution bandwidths 1 kHz are required and a high dynamic range is not required DISPlay WINDow SCALe LOG RANGe AUTO OFF disables auto ranging and results in increased measurement update rate Disable the IF Video Sweep output ports If the analyzer has Options A4J IF Video and Sweep Ports or AYX Fast Time Domain Sweeps various output signals with rear panel ports are controlled by instrument processing If these ports are not used in a particular application SYSTem PORTs IFVSweep ENABle OFF can be used to disable the ports and conserve instrument resources Chapter 1 45 Programming Fundamentals Improving Measurement Speed Select phase noise performance SENSe FREQuency SYNThesis can be used to optimize either phase noise performance or tuning speed In some settings optimizing for tuning speed reduces sweep time and the re tune time between sweeps In other settings only the re tune time is improved Use binary data format instead of A
235. ide trace data in mdBm The fastest mode is INTeger 32 For uncorrected trace data TRACe with parameter RAWTRACE UINTeger and INTeger formats apply to RAWTRACE queries and return uncorrected ADC values The fastest mode is UINTeger 16 For state data the format cannot be changed It is always in a machine readable format only machine units Chapter 5 243 Language Reference FORMat Subsystem Table 5 2 Corrected Trace Data Types TRACe DATA trace name Result ASCII Amplitude Units INT 32 fastest Internal Units REAL 32 Amplitude Units REAL 64 Amplitude Units Table 5 3 Uncorrected Trace Data Types TRACe DATA RAWTRACE Result INT 32 Uncorrected ADC Values UINT 16 fastest Uncorrected ADC Values ASCii Amplitude values are in ASCII in amplitude units separated by commas INTeger 32 Binary 32 bit integer values in internal units mdBm in a definite length block REAL 32 or 64 Binary 32 bit or 64 bit real values in amplitude units in a definite length block UINTeger 16 Binary 16 bit unsigned integer uncorrected ADC values ina definite length block Factory Preset and RST ASCII 244 Chapter5 Language Reference HCOPy Subsystem HCOPy Subsystem The HCOPy subsystem controls the setup of plotting and printing to an external device Abort the Print HCOPy Aborts hard copy printout of
236. ied after each measurement to check the Questionable Status Summary bit 3 If it is equal to 1 a condition during the test made the test results invalid If it is equal to 0 this indicates that no hardware problem or measurement problem was detected by the analyzer Factory Preset and RST 0 Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Event Query STATus QUEStionable EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Questionable Frequency Condition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions 312 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Frequency Enable STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable FREQuency ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Frequency Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Frequency Event register which also sets the Frequency Summary bit bit 5 in the Questionable Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of
237. ientation of the print Landscape mode is not presently supported for PCL 3 printers Factory Preset and RST The factory default is Landscape This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Print Setup Orientation Landscape Print Setup Orientation Portrait Number of Items Printed on a Page HCOPy PAGE PRINts integer HCOPy PAGE PRINt S Sets the number of display print outputs sent to print on one piece of paper before a form feed is sent Chapter 5 247 Language Reference HCOPy Subsystem Factory Preset and RST The factory default is 1 This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Integer 1 or 2 Front Panel Access Print Setup Prints Page 1 2 Printed Page Size PAGE SIZE A B A3 A4 LETTer LEGal EXECutive LEDGer HCOPy PAGE SIZE Formats the print image for the selected page size Page size is letter and page size is ledger There is no size standardization for legal or executive Factory Preset and RST The factory default is letter This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Print Setup Page Size Select Report Type HCOPy REPOrt TYPE SCREen REPort Toggles between s
238. ignal in the signal list Valid range is 1 to 2000 Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal Marking Clear 204 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection Set Comment for Signals CALCulate EMI SLISt COMMent ALL lt string gt Set comment for all signals Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks The comment is a string consisting of a single line of text with a maximum length of text characters of 31 Characters in excess of 31 are truncated Set Comment for Current Signal CALCulate EMI SLISt COMMent CURRent lt string gt Set comment for current signal Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks The comment is a string consisting of a single line of text with a maximum length of text characters of 31 Characters in excess of 31 are truncated Set Comment for Marked Signals CALCulate EMI SLISt COMMent MARKed lt string gt Set comment for all marked signals Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks The comment is a string consisting of a single line of text with a maximum length of text characters of 31 Characters in excess of 31 are truncated Delete Signal CALCulate EMI SLISt DELete ALL CURRent MARKed integer Deletes all current marked or specific signals from signal list Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks This command takes an integer value which corresponds to the position of a signal in the signal list Va
239. igure command Use the commands in the SENSe lt measurement gt and CALCulate lt measurement gt subsystems to change the settings Then you can use the READ command or the INITiate and FETCh commands to initiate the measurement and query the results See Figure 5 1 Chapter 5 255 Language Reference MEASure Group of Commands Figure 5 1 Measurement Group of Commands Start from Any Inst State MEASure CONFigure INITiate Sets default Initialize Acquired data state then taking of is calculated waits data and returned gt ABORt SENSe amp CALCulate INITiate RESTart returns commands to this change the point settings from the defaults ca81a If you need to repeatedly make a given measurement with settings other than the factory defaults you can use the commands in the SENSe lt measurement gt and CALCulate lt measurement gt subsystems to set up the measurement Then use the READ command or INITiate and FETCh commands to initiate the measurement and query results Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then return to a previous one Use READ lt measurement gt if you want to use those persistent settings If you want to go back to the default settings use MEASure lt measurement gt Read Commands READ measurement Does not preset the measurement to the factory defaults The MEASure and CONFigure commands reset the parame
240. ile NAMES Loose er SOE RR REORDER CORP REA EE VUA NA E PERS es 265 MMEMory S TORE SI GNallst aile Daniele cca sacked ae PRAEC ee bat RE RE Sore kehenke hwnd bowed S 263 S Name 265 MMEMory STORE TRACES labels tile name RR ERROR RA 266 SOUTPu D STATS OPPO SERRE 267 TAME EX ROCA HEC KR ORO EERE EAS RACER AGE FR NES 267 e m aa aqua doa a dock Rd Rd bad E E XE E SA A PAPER T 256 303 SOUR 303 QI EL DE mde hen Seder dua 303 25 Commands Alphabetical Listing SOURCEPOWecAl Tennaton AUTO OFFIONION deu ik ACE eRe Sees 304 UU Beg POSSIT Tenastiou AUTO Las iude p erre EPI PR eb qct e e pag 304 SOURCE PO Wer AT 303 SOURCE PO Wer MODE deh ke eh pee ied ee Od Seek 305 SOURS POW C MODET i sh ksi P aq Glib Poo RES 305 DOLTROGPONECSPAN ael Sd rad s be STRE Edd didi 305 SOURS POW eS EDU 305 SOURCEPOWECS TAR 2 esee Resse Goad REESE Rd ord ea ENRERE ett dde 306 SOURCE PON STAN eror fitto dta da tke det p e RE E EErEE ESETERE ERR eck sages 306 SOURCE PO Were TBP AUTO OPPIONBLHT atas hoe SSRN eee E EUR S RR ER pP E dans eas 306 SOUR POW STEP AUT
241. in or limit test is On Use the command CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 to activate limit line testing Set the Margin Size CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin lt 1 1 gt CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin Allows you to define the amount of measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line Factory Preset and RST not affected Default Units dB Remarks The margin must be negative for upper limit lines and positive for lower limits Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Margin On Off Display the Limit Margin CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe Allows you to display a measurement margin that is added to the designated limit line to do secondary testing of the data Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Margin On Off 214 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Control Limit Line Testing CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 STATe Turns limit line testing on off The limit and margin will only be tested if they are displayed Use CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay to turn on the display of limit lines and CALCulate LLINe 1 2 MARGin STATe to turn on the display of margins If margin and limit display are both turned off limit test is automatically turned off Use CALCulate LLINe 1 2 FAIL to return the state of pass or fail after limit line stat
242. in trace 3 firmware version greater than A 03 03 NRML in firmware version less than or equal to A 03 03 Front Panel Access View Trace Normalize Normalize On Off 228 Chapter 5 Language Reference CALibration Subsystem CALibration Subsystem These commands control the self alignment and self diagnostic processes Align All Instrument Assemblies CALibration ALL CALibration ALL Performs an alignment of all the assemblies within the instrument except for the tracking generator Option 1DN if installed except Agilent model 7401 Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent EMC analyzers except Agilent model E7401A If the cable is not connected CAL ALL will perform a subset of the RF alignment and a subsequent CAL RF will be required for the analyzer to meet its specified performance The query performs a full alignment and returns a number indicating the success of the alignment A zero is returned if the alignment is successful even if only a subset of the RF alignment is performed Front Panel Access System Alignments Align Now All Set Auto Align Mode All or Not RF CALibration AUTO MODE ALL CALibration AUTO MODE This command determines whether or not to include RF alignment as part of the automatic alignment routines Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents changes in the input imped
243. ine commands Delete All Correction Sets in Memory CALCulate LLINe ALL DELete Deletes all correction sets in volatile memory History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Display Limits Delete All Limits Control Limit Line Amplitude Interpolation CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE LOGarithmic LINear CALCulate LLINe 1 2 AMPLitude INTerpolate TYPE Selects the type of interpolation done for the amplitude values of the designated limit line when comparing to measured data Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks Once this function is defined the selected type is persistent Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Amptd Interp Log Lin Set Fixed or Relative Limit Lines CALCulate LLINe CMODe FIXed RELative CALCulate LLINe CMODe Specifies whether the current limit lines are fixed or relative If you need to change the domain with CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain do it before this command Changing the domain deletes all the existing limit line values Chapter 5 209 NOTE Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks For Amplitude Parameters Regardless of whether the limit line is based on frequency or sweep time amplitude parameters in a limit line table represent ab
244. ion definition 59 questionable condition 310 service request enable description 67 status byte description 66 remeasure signal list 259 report content 245 reset IEEE command 196 resolution bandwidth automatic on off 272 coupling 272 ratio auto manual 273 Index Index ratio to video BW 273 type on off 275 value 272 RF alignment on off 229 calibration 231 overload reset 253 RS 232 bus baud rate 52 character format parameters 52 data transfer errors 53 handshake 52 modem handshaking 53 overview 52 serial interface settings 52 RTS for serial bus 320 5 sample detection 284 save command 196 scale type linear logarithmic 298 scaling 242 SCPI command subsystems locating 191 errors during execution 323 errors locating 323 version query 327 screen image storing 265 self test query 197 separator syntax 48 serial bus DTR 319 receive baud 320 receive PACE 321 RTS 320 transmit PACE 321 serial bus overview 52 serial interface settings 52 service request accessing status register method 62 enable register 67 generating 63 IEEE command 196 using 63 service request enable register bit descriptions 68 description 67 signal list add marker 258 add marker frequency amplitude 201 add peaks 259 append data 201 cursor to 207 display parameters 208 loading from file 263 on off 206 remeasure all signals 259 sort key 207 storing 263 signal peak
245. is no current SCPI standard for RS 232 Although one intent of SCPI is to be interface independent END is only defined for IEEE 488 operation At the time of this writing the RS 232 terminator issue was in the process of being addressed in IEEE standard 1174 A semicolon is not a SCPI terminator it is a separator The purpose of the separator is to queue multiple commands or queries in order to obtain multiple actions and or responses Make sure that you do not attempt to use the semicolon as a terminator when using RS 232 control Basically all binary trace and response data is terminated with lt NL gt lt END gt as defined in Section 8 5 of IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 486 1 1987 New York NY 1992 The following are some examples of good and bad commands The examples are created from an EMC analyzer with the simple set of commands indicated below SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation 40dB SENSe FREQuency STARt POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer 48 Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line TRIGger SEQuence EXTernal 1 SLOPe POSitive Bad Command Good Command PWR ATT 40dB POW ATT 40dB The short form of POWER is POW not PWR FREQ STAR 30MHz MIX RANG 20dBm FREQ STAR 30MHz POW MIX RANG 20dBm The MIX RANGcommand 15 in the same SENSE subsystem
246. k Det Demod Detector Sample 284 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe DETector Subsection Det Demod Detector Negative Peak Det Demod Detector Average Type of EMI Detector SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI QPEak AVERage OFF SENSe DETector FUNCtion EMI Specifies the type of EMI detection mode Quasi peak detection displays a weighted sample detected amplitude using specific charge discharge and meter time constants as described in CISPR Publication 16 Average detection displays the average value of a sample detected amplitude Factory Preset and RST Remarks Key Access Chapter 5 Off When either of the EMI detectors are selected for the first time a ranging operation is performed which adjusts the reference level to a reasonable level for performing measurements The ranging operation will first adjust the reference level in LOGarithmic scale units and then in LINear scale units While doing so EMIPk will be displayed in the upper left corner of the display Once the reference level has been properly adjusted the selected EMI detector will be activated Depending on the detector chosen EMI QP or EMIAv will be displayed in the upper left display corner When setting the EMI detector to Off the analyzer performs an UNRange and will display the various instrument settings adjusted by the range operation The previous detector is also restored When the QPeak or AVERage EM
247. ker amplitude this is the fundamental amplitude in dBm viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n 1f amp fFundaAmptdDbm Change the amplitude units to Volts viPrintf viESA UNIT POW V Read the marker amplitude in volts This is the fundamental amplitude in Volts necessary for the THD calculation viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n S1f amp dFundaAmptdv Read the marker frequency viQueryf viESA CALC MARK X n 1 amp dMarkerFreq dFundamental dMarkerFreq 166 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB Measure each harmonic amplitude as follows for 1Num 2 1Num lt 1MaxHarmonic 1Num Measuring the Harmonic No d message printf n t Measuring the Harmonic No d n 1Num Set the span to 20 MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 20 MHZ n Set the center frequency to the nominal harmonic frequency dHarmFreq lNum dFundamental viPrintf viESA SENS 1 HZ n dHarmFreq Take a sweep and wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep Perform a peak search and wait for completion viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n increase timeout to 60 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI_ATTR_TMO VALUE 60000 Activate signal track viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT ON n Zoom down to a 100 kHz span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10e4 n Take a sweep a
248. ker delta value This command is not available in zero span Front Panel Access Marker gt Mkr Stop Marker On Off CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 STATe 222 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Turns the selected marker on or off Front Panel Access Marker Off Marker Table On Off CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer TABLe STATe Turns the marker table on or off Front Panel Access Marker Marker Table On Off Marker to Trace CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe integer CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe Assigns the specified marker to the designated trace 1 2 or 3 Factory Preset and RST 1 Range 1 to 3 Front Panel Access Marker Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3 Marker to Trace Auto CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRACe AUTO Turns on or off the automatic marker to trace function Factory Preset and RST AUTO ON Front Panel Access Marker Marker Trace Auto 1 2 3 Continuous Signal Tracking Function CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 TRCKing STATe Turns on or off marker signal tracking It continuously puts the selected marker on the highest displayed signal peak and moves it to the center frequency This allows you to keep a signal that is drifting in frequency on the display Chapter
249. kers Trace averaging when the Average Type is Power RMS The detector type is sample if any of the following conditions are true Trace averaging is on with average type of video Both max and min hold trace modes are on Resolution bandwidth is less than 1 kHz and noise marker band power markers or trace averaging is on The detector type is negative peak if any trace is in min hold and no traces are in max hold The detector type is peak if the above conditions are off Manually changing the detector function turns Auto off Refer to Figure 5 4 which shows a decision tree of how detection type is determined 282 Chapter 5 Language Reference SENSe DETector Subsection Figure 5 4 Auto Rules of Detector Selection PEAK No Yes Res Bw Yes gt 300 Hz AVERAGE No No SAMPLE Band Power Yes Res Bw Yes AVERAGE ON 300 Hz AVERAGE No No SAMPLE Yes Average Type Yes AVERAGE Power No No SAMPLE Demod View SAMPLE ON No Any Trace in Max Hold Any Trace in Min Hold SAMPLE No Any Trace in Min Hold Yes NEGATIVE PEAK No PEAK cl72a Chapter 5 283 NOTE Language Reference SENSe DETector Subsection Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access Det Demod Detector Type of Detection SENSe DETector FUNCtion NEGative POSitive SAMP1le AVERage RMS
250. l correction set use SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Antenna Correction On Off Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Cable Correction On Off Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Other Correction On Off Amplitude Y Scale Corrections User Correction On Off Set Amplitude Correction Data SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA freq rel ampl freq rel ampl SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 DATA Sets the amplitude correction data These frequency amplitude corrections will be applied to the displayed data to correct for system losses gains outside the analyzer Four different sets of correction data can be stored Example CORR CSET1 DATA 900E6 0 3 1 0E9 0 35 1 3E9 0 2 Range 200 points per set 276 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection Default Unit There are no units on the frequency and amplitude pairs They must be entered in hertz Hz and decibels dB Remarks CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET CSETI is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSET3 is Other CSET4 is User Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Antenna Edit PointlFrequencylAmplitudelDelete Point Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Cable Edit PointlFrequencylAmplitudelDelete Point Amplitude Y Scale Corrections Other Edit PointlFrequencylAmplitudelDelete Point Amplitude Y Scale Corr
251. le Character A vertical stroke between Command parameters indicates SENSe DETector FUNCtion alternative choices The effect NEGative POSitive SAMPle of the command is different The choices are neg pos and samp depending on which parameter SENSe DETector FUNCtion SAMP1e is one possible is selected command choice A vertical stroke between key Command words indicates identical SENSe CHPower BANDwidth BWIDth INTegrati effects exist for several key on words Only one of these ke SRY y Two identical commands are words is used at a time The SENSe CHPower BANDwidth INTegration command functions the same SENSe BWIDth INTegration for either key word Key words in square brackets Command are optional when composing SENSe BANDwidth RESolution AUTO the command These implied P The following commands are all valid and have identical key words will be executed even if they are omitted ee y bandwidth auto bandwidth resolution auto sense bandwidth auto lt gt Angle brackets around a word Command or words indicates they are not to be used literally in the command They represent the needed item SENSe FREQ freq In this command example the word lt freq gt should be replaced by an actual frequency SENSe FREQ 9 7 MHz tj Parameters in braces can optionally be used in the command either not at all once
252. lid range is 1 to 2000 Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal List Delete Signal Chapter 5 205 Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection Turn Signal List On or Off CALCulate EMI SLISt DISPlay STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate EMI SLISt DISPlay STATe Sets the state of the signal list On or Off Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks Once the state function is selected the selected state is persistent Persistent means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access MEASURE More Signal List MEASURE More Signal List List Edit MEASURE More Signal List Delete Signals MEASURE More Signal List Remeasure MEASURE More Signal List Signal Marking MEASURE More Signal List Sort Signals Retrieve Signal as a String CALCulate EMI SLISt FETCh CURRent lt integer gt Retrieve the current or specific signal as a string comma separated fields Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Remarks This command takes an lt integer gt value which corresponds to the position of a signal in the signal list Valid range is 1 to 2000 Retrieve Signals in List CALCulate EMI SLISt LENGth Retrieve the number of signals in the signal list Factory Preset and RST Not affected by preset Mark Selected Signals CALCulate EMI SLISt MARK ALL CURRent TOEnd DUPLicate LOWer COMPlement integer Marks signals based on t
253. litude 1f dB n n fFundaAmptdDbm Fundamental Frequency in MHz printf t Fundamental Frequency is 1 MHz n n dFundamental 10e5 Relative amplitude of each harmonic in dBc for 1Num 2 lNum lMaxHarmonic 1Num printf Relative amplitude of Harmonic d 1 dBc n n Num fRelAmptd 1Num Total harmonic distortion in percent printf t Total Harmonic Distortion 1 percent n n dPrentDistort Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 168 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 J F RRR RI II III I e e e He cock eco I IOI I IOI IOI IOI IO ICAO IAC k k k k eek f Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens an RS 232 session to the COM1 serial port Clears the Analyzer CLS Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Set the analyzer center frequency to the fundamental SENS FREQ CENT freq Set the analyzer to 10 MHz span SENS FREQ SPAN 10 MHZ Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CO
254. ll existing data Up to 200 points may be defined for each limit No units are allowed e lt x axis gt be frequency or time values as specified by CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Frequencies are always in Hz Time is always in seconds No unit is allowed in this parameter ampl amplitude values are in the current Y axis units Up to two amplitude values can be provided for each x axis value by repeating x axis in the data list No unit is allowed in this parameter connected connected values are either 0 or 1 A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point The connected value is ignored for the first point Example CALC LLIN1 DATA 1000000000 20 0 200000000 30 1 Range x axis 30 Gs to 30 Gs for time limits Chapter 5 211 Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Remarks Front Panel Access 212 x axis 30 GHz to 350 GHz for frequency limits lt 1 gt 120 dBm to 100 dBm connected 0 or 1 If two amplitude values are entered for the same frequency a single vertical line is the result In this case if an upper line is chosen the amplitude of lesser frequency amplitude 1 is tested If a lower line is chosen the amplitude of greater frequency amplitude 2 is tested For linear amplitude interpolation and line
255. long 10 01 iNum set to 13 times number of sweep points 8192 sweep points maximum iNum 106496 lCount 0 Open a serial session at COMI viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM if viStatus viOpen defaultRM ASRL1 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp viESA VI SUCCESS printf Could not open a session to ASRL device at 1 exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument This will set number of sweep points to default of 401 viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t tRead in Trace Data using ASCII Format RS232 Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Query number of sweep points per trace firmware revision A 04 00 and later For firmware revisions prior to A 04 00 the number of sweep points is 401 iSwpPnts 401 viQueryf viESA SENSE SWEEP POINTS Wn d amp iSwpPnts Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHz n Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHz n Chapter 3 127 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 set the analyzer to single sweep mode viPrintf 1 INIT CONT 0 Mn Trigger a spectrum measurement viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WM Read the operation complete query viQueryf vi
256. lowing is a summary of sessions that can be opened e A resource manager session is used to initialize the VISA system It is a parent session that knows about all the opened sessions A resource manager session must be opened before any other session can be opened A device session is used to communicate with a device on an interface A device session must be opened for each device you will be using When you use a device session you can communicate without worrying about the type of interface to which it is connected This insulation makes applications more robust and portable across interfaces Typically a device is an instrument but could be a computer a plotter or a printer All devices that you will be using need to be connected and in working condition prior to the first VTL function call v iOpenDefaultRM The system is configured only on the first viOpenDefaultRM per process Therefore if viOpenDefaultRM is called without devices connected and then called again when devices are connected the devices will not be recognized You must close ALL resource manager sessions and re open with all devices connected and in working condition Device Sessions There are two parts to opening a communications session with a specific device First you must open a session to the default resource manager with the viOpenDefaultRM function The first call to this function initializes the default resource manager and returns a session to that resour
257. lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STARt Position the left most marker the start reference frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X position Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X position start reference frequency of the designated marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker active marker Delta Pair Chapter 5 225 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Position CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X POSition STOP Position the right most marker the stop frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X position Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X position stop frequency of the designated marker Range Refer to the SENSe SWEep POINts command Front Panel Access Marker lt active marker gt Delta Marker X Axis Readout CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout FREQuency TIME ITIMe PERiod CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X READout Selects the units for the x axis readout of the marker Available units are Frequency Time Inverse of time Period Factory Preset and RST Frequency Front Panel Access Marker Readout Frequency Marker Readout Time Marker Readou
258. ly interpolated between correction points with respect to the logarithm of the frequency Linear frequency scale corrections are interpolated along straight lines connecting adjacent points on a linear scale Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections Freq Interp Log Lin Perform Amplitude Correction SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe CORRection CSET 1 2 3 4 STATe Turns the amplitude correction function on or off for the given set SENSe CORRection CSET ALL STATe must be on for this command to function Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks CSET number equivalents to front panel access definitions are as follows CSET or CSETI is Antenna CSET2 is Cable CSET3 is Other CSET4 is User Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Corrections AntennalCablelOtherlUser Correction On Off 278 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe CORRection Subsection Input Impedance Correction SENSe CORRection INPut MAGNitude number SENSe CORRection INPut MAGNitude Amplitude correction is applied to the display data to adjust for measurement situations where the unit under test has a different impedance than the 50Q input impedance of the analyzer Factory Preset and RST The factory default is the input impedance of the analyzer Range 50 or 75 ohms Default Unit ohms Front Panel Access Input Input Z Cor
259. lyzers 189 NOTE Language Reference The first few pages of this chapter contain common commands specified in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Following these commands the Agilent EMC analyzers SCPI commands are listed Refer to Chapter 2 Status Registers which supplements the information presented in this chapter In addition refer to Chapter 6 Front Panel Key Reference in the Agilent EMC Analyzers User s Guide for additional information about the operation of each analyzer function Use the analyzer HELP key to obtain similar information about analyzer key functions Refer to Chapter 6 Agilent 8590 EMC Analyzers Programming Conversion Guide for specific backwards compatibility information between commands for HP Agilent 8590 Series spectrum analyzers and Agilent EMC analyzers 190 Chapter 5 Language Reference SCPI Sections and Subsections SCPI Sections and Subsections SCPI commands related to major functional areas such as calculate or are grouped into blocks or subsystems Some of these subsystems are further divided into subsections such as calculate marker or sense harmonics An instrument model is then created to represent the way in which instrument functionality is viewed and categorized by SCPI Refer to IEEE SCPI 1997 Volume 2 Command Reference Standard Commands for Progra
260. mand is used to adjust the Video Trigger level when in FM Demod and Demod View is on Default Unit Hz Remarks Video is adjusted using this command but must also be selected using the command TRIGger SEQuence SOURce VIDeo When not in FM Demod the Video Trigger level is adjusted queried using the command TRIGger SEQuence VIDeo LEVel lt 1 gt Trigger Delay is not available in Video trigger mode so turning Video on turns off Trigger Delay but preserves the value of Trigger Delay Chapter 5 337 Language Reference UNIT Subsystem UNIT Subsystem Select Power Units of Measure UNIT POWer DBM DBMV DBUV DBUA V W A UNIT POWer Specifies amplitude units for the input output and display Factory Preset and RST dBm in log amplitude scale volts in linear amplitude scale History Ampere and decibel microampere units are available only with instruments having firmware revision A 06 00 and later Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBm AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBmV AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBuV AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units Volts AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units Watts AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units Amps AMPLITUDE Y Scale Amptd Units dBuA 338 Chapter5 Agilent 8590 EMC Analyzers Programming Conversion Guide 339 Agilent 8590 EMC Analyzers Programming Conversion Guide Remove This Page Formt117 NOTE Please rem
261. mmable Instruments Version 1997 0 May 1997 for a more complete description of the SCPI instrument model The SCPI subsystems in this chapter are listed in alphabetical order Likewise the SCPI commands are in alphabetical order within the subsystem in which they belong Refer to the following table to locate SCPI command subsystems and subsections by page number SCPI Subsystem Subsection Page IEEE Common Commands page 193 ABORt page 198 CALCulate page 199 CALCulate EMESLISt page 201 CALCulate LLINe page 209 CALCulate MARKer page 216 CALCulate NTData page 228 CALibration page 229 CONFigure see MEAS page 254 COUPIe page 233 DISPlay page 235 FETCh see MEASure page 254 FORMat page 243 HCOPy page 245 NITiate page 249 INPut page 252 MEASure page 254 MMEMory page 260 OUTPut page 267 Chapter 5 191 Language Reference SCPI Sections and Subsections SCPI Subsystem Subsection Page READ see MEASure page 254 SENSe page 268 SENSe AVERage page 269 SENSe BANDwidth page 272 SENSe CORRection page 276 SENSe DEMod page 280 SENSe DETector page 282 SENSe EMI page 287 SENSe FREQuency page 290 SENSe POWer page 295 SENSe SWEep page 298 SOURce page 303 STATus page 308 STATus QUEStionable page 310 SYSTem page 319 TRACe page 328 TRIGger page 334 UNIT
262. mmand int ipTraceData Chapter 3 181 Programming Examples Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements trace data must point to an integer array of size NUM POINTS memcpy amp cOutBuffer strlen cScpiCommand ipTraceData iArrayLength memcpy amp cOutBuffer cScpiCommand strlen cScpiCommand Add a lt newline gt to the end of the data This isn t necessary if the GPIB card has been configured to assert EOI when the last character is sent but it ensures a valid iTermLength is provided cOutBuffer iArrayLength strlen cScpiCommand 0x0A iBlockSize strlen cScpiCommand iArrayLength 1 viWrite viESA ViBuf cOutBuffer iBlockSize amp lRetCount fee Measure and calculate power average of multiple measurements ok A kk ex x void average int 1 0 iLoop 0 int iArray long 10 0L double dLogTen log 10 0 setup iTotalRetCount lRetCount 0 start the timer ftime amp start time Now run through the event loop iNumTraces times for i 0 i lt iNumTraces i trigger a new measurement and wait for complete viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAI n Read the trace data into a buffer viPrintf viESA TRAC DATA TRACE1 n viRead viESA ViBuf cInBuffer ViUInt32 iBlockSize amp lRetCount iTotalRetCount lRetCount copy trace data to an array byte order swapping could be done here rather th
263. mmary Bit 1 in this bit position indicates that the standard event status summary bit has been set The standard event status register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set 6 64 Request Service RQS Summery Bit A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has at least one reason to report a status change This bit is also called the master summary status bit MSS 7 128 Operation Status Summary Bit A 1 this bit position indicates that the operation status summary bit has been set The operation status event register can then be read to determine the specific event that caused this bit to be set To query the status byte register send the STB command The response will be the decimal sum of the bits that are set to 1 For example if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8 So the decimal value 136 is returned Service Request Enable Register In addition to the status byte register the status byte group also contains the service request enable register The status byte service request enable register lets you choose which bits in the Status Byte Register will trigger a service request Send the SRE number command where number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable plus the decimal value of bit 6 For example assume that you want to enable bit 7 so that whenever the operatio
264. mode 333 smoothing number of points 332 smoothing select 330 storing 266 subtraction 332 subtraction of display line 333 transferring data 328 view 333 writing 333 trace loading from file 262 tracking generator attenuation 303 attenuation auto on off 304 calibration 232 commands 303 correction offset 303 fixed swept 305 output on off 267 power level 304 tracking 307 tracking peak 307 power sweep on off 305 range 305 307 start amplitude 306 step auto on off 306 Index Index step size 306 trigger commands 334 external delay on off 334 delay value 334 slope 334 IEEE command 197 level gate 296 measurement 250 offset 335 source video 336 video level amplitude 336 video level frequency 337 U units setting power 338 URL Agilent Technologies 4 user preset 326 user preset saving 327 V video bandwidth auto on off 273 couple to resolution bandwidth 273 ratio auto manual 273 ration to resolution bandwidth 273 values setting 273 video output on off 325 video trigger level amplitude 336 level frequency 337 source 336 view commands 235 VISA library 97 99 W wait IEEE command 197 Y y axis amplitude scaling 240 frequency scaling 240 units 338 Index 349
265. n STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Calibration Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Condition STATus QUEStionable CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Chapter 5 311 NOTE NOTE NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Enable STATus QUEStionable ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable ENABle This command determines which bits in the Questionable Condition Register will set bits in the Questionable Event register which also sets the Questionable Status Summary bit bit3 in the Status Byte Register The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The preset condition is to have all bits in this enable register set to 0 To have any Questionable Events reported to the Status Byte Register 1 or more bits need to be set to 1 The Status Byte Event Register should be quer
266. n instrument to return to local control with a fully enabled front panel sometimes called local resume Aclear function that causes all GPIB instruments or addressed instruments to assume a cleared condition The definition of clear is unique for each instrument sometimes called clear reset control send In the Agilent EMC Analyzer clear does the following 1 Clears the Input Buffer and the Output Queue 2 Resets the parser 3 Clears any current operations such as OPC i e returns the device to Operation Complete Query Idle State and Operation Complete Command Idle State 4 Aborts resumes the current sweep Anoutput function that is used to send function commands and data commands from the controller to the addressed instrument sometimes called output control convert image iobuffer transfer Anenter function that is the complement of the output function and is used to transfer data from the addressed instrument to the controller sometimes called enter convert image iobuffer on timeout set timeout transfer Chapter 1 51 Programming Fundamentals Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX Overview of RS 232 Option 1A X Serial interface programming techniques are similar to most general I O applications Due to the asynchronous nature of serial I O operations special care must be exercised to ensure that data is not lost by sending to another device before the device is ready to receive Modem line
267. n ergab uro lr Re x eer x REX VPRENRX ERE ERG GN 216 CALCulate MARKer FCOunt RESolution AUTO cece BR 217 CALCulate MARKer FCOuntRESolutionzAUTOT 217 CALCulate MARKer PCOunt RESoluti n 216 MARK SPAN 226 GCALCUllS MARBESCPBARE 5 cies osenacebkiseeeREEU REX UT Race Ka oe fe ane Re og e Ree SOR CE RR TR 220 MARK ercPEAKCEXC utsion rel ERRARE UR AR RR 220 ALL Ue MARK PEAR EXCMO up dues RRRETI x eque RE dab R GR SR G 220 CALCulate MARKer PEAK SEARch MODE PARameterIMAXimum 0 0 0 0 cece eee 220 CALCulate MARKer PEAK THReshold amplo 00s eee sci seek ee vost RU RR RR RR RR ees EA 221 CALCUIBUSNMUXERSCPEAR THRSSBORIY REE barks RYE qd 221 CALC ulate MARKer TABLE STATS e kc S 223 CALL ute MAR Ken TABLE STAI REP ege 223 217 CALCulate MARKer 1 I2134 CPEak STATe OFFIONIOIN losses III 216 CALC wate MARR ern MAIC PER S VATE csc cade ntsc i ieee qb e qub A qactbeg C EE d Rd 216 CAL lee MAR er OE iius dices dme da um eb ahead Ree RR d db x pep petii 217 CALCulate MAREer 1 2134 PCOunt S TATe nanan 217 CALCulate MARRKer 12134 S TATe iussa RR EE ta dese GRE ERE Y gor 217 19 Commands Alphabetical
268. n status summary bit is set to 1 it will trigger a service request Send the SRE 192 128 64 command The SRE command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits enabled previously with the SRE number command You must always add 64 the numeric value of RQS bit 6 to your numeric sum when you enable any bits for a service request The service request enable register contains the following bits Chapter 2 67 Figure 2 5 NOTE Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Service Request Enable Register SRE num SRE cb912a The service request enable register presets to zeros 0 Standard Event Status Register The standard event status register is used to determine the specific event that sets bit 5 in the status byte register The standard event status register does not have negative and positive transition registers nor a condition register Use the IEEE common commands at the beginning of Chapter 5 Language Reference in this guide to access the register To query the standard event status register send the ESR command The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 For example if bit number 7 and bit number 3 are set to 1 the decimal sum of the 2 bits is 128 plus 8 So the decimal value 136 is returned See Setting and Querying the Status Register on page 65 in this chapter for more information 68
269. nd Event Enable Registers The Questionable Status Frequency condition register continuously monitors output frequency status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUESt ionable FREQuency CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The negative and positive transition filters specify which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition num negative transition STATus QUEStionable FREQuency PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Frequency Event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable FREQuency See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 77 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable FREQ ENABle num 82 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine
270. nd wait for the sweep completion TakeSweep Signal track off viPrintf viESA CALC MARK TRCK STAT OFF n Reset timeout to 3 sec viSetAttribute viESA VI_ATTR_TMO VALUE 3000 Set Marker Amplitude in Volts viPrintf viESA UNIT POW V n Perform a peak search and wait for completion viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX n Query and read the Marker Amplitude in Volts Store the result in the array Chapter 3 167 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y NMn 1f amp fHarmV 1Num Change the amplitude units to DBM viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Read the marker amplitude viQueryf viESA CALC MARK Y n 1 amp fHarmDbm 1Num Sum the square of each element in the fHarmV array Then calculate the relative amplitude of each harmonic relative to the fundamental for 1Num 2 1Num lt 1MaxHarmonic 1Num dSumSquare dSumSquare pow double fHarmV lNum 2 0 Relative Amplitude fRelAmptd l1Num fHarmDbm 1Num fFundaAmptdDbm Calculate the total harmonic distortion by dividing the square root of the sum of the squares dSumSquare by the fundamental amplitude in Volts dFundaAmptdV Multiply this value by 100 to obtain a result in percent dPrcntDistort sqrt double dSumSquare dFundaAmptdV 100 Fundamental amplitude in dBm printf NnNt Fundamental Amp
271. ne and define the lower limit line to have the following frequency amplitude pairs viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE2 TYPE LOW n Send the lower limit line data viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE2 DATA 40E06 100 1 49 99E06 100 1 50E06 30 1 50 01E06 100 1 60EH06 100 1 n Turn on display viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE2 DISP ON n Turn the limit line test function on viPrintf viESA CALC LLINE2 STAT ON n 138 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Limit Lines Set the analyzer to a center frequency of 50 MHz span to 20 MHz and resolution bandwidth to 1 MHz viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50e6 n viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 20e6 n viPrintf viESA SENS BWID RES 1 Set the analyzer reference level to 0 dBm viPrintf viESA DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL RLEV 0 Mn Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Trigger a spectrum measurement viPrintf viESA Check for operation complete viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10pc printf Program Abort error ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Check to see if limit line passes or fails It should pass printf n t Limit Line status after activating the 50MHz signal Wn Print the limits line result printResult Pause for 5 seconds YIELD Deactivate the 50 MHz
272. ned on for video averaging when any of the MEASURE key measurements are in progress that measurement will be stopped Front Panel Access BW Avg Average On Off Chapter 5 269 Figure 5 2 Language Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection Turn Automatic Averaging On Off SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe AVERage TYPE AUTO Sets the averaging to be automatically set to the appropriate type for the current measurement setup Or allows you to manually choose the type of averaging with SENSe AVERage TYPE When AUTO is On If the Y Axis Scale is not Linear or Log then average type is Video Y Axis Scale Averaging If the Y Axis Scale is Linear or Log then average type is Power Averaging If the Detector is Peak Sample or Negative Peak not Average then average type is Video Average See Figure 5 2 which shows these auto rules for average type in flowchart format Auto Rules for Average Type Auto Rules for Average Type Yes Type Video Is Y Axis Scale Hz Demod View No Is Detector Average Yes Type Power Type Video 270 Chapter5 cl79a NOTE Language Reference SENSe AVERage Subsection Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access BW Avg Avg Type Auto Man Type of Averaging for Measurements SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo RMS SENSe AVERage TYPE Successive measurements of data
273. ng Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB re 116 Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit RU Chal ed be E NECI VPE AERE REEL ES TIRE ED 120 Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 125 Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 130 Uone Lant ONES qur rrr te rer 135 Mesume NONE qudeuddseuez qestuadedES ee Serr RO E REA p Ed er d Erde s 141 Entering Amplitude Correction Data shes Rhe ERR ER ERE SA 145 Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done 149 Contents Determine if an Eror has Occurred 2 123 Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB saos e n Rua 161 Measuring Harmonic Distortion 3 232 169 Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements 177 4 Programming Command Cross References Functional Index to SCPI Subsection ccc cc eee ee ee eens 186 5 Language Reference RE ash 191 193 LAUR DUBIE 193 Prem 193 standard Event Status Enable ERR ERR AERA RADAR 193 Standard Event Status Rec ter QUY iu esae dE m RU YEA 194 EUER CE 6nd pense onde eee E Ed AT Kd E DERE ds 194 l sbeument Stute 194 ocv pA ir eee ees ci ees 195 Query euquaescesecb Tes e
274. nit dB Front Panel Access Source Power Sweep On Off Output Power Tracking SOURce POWer TRCKing integer SOURce POWer TRCKing Adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer sweep in the present resolution bandwidth Factory Preset and RST This command is persistent The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Integer 0 to 4095 Remarks This command is not needed with the 1 5 GHz tracking generator Front Panel Access Source Man Track Adj Output Power Tracking Peak SOURCe POWer 1 PEAK Automatically adjusts the tracking of the source output with the spectrum analyzer sweep so that the power is maximized for the present resolution bandwidth Remarks This command is not applicable for the 1 5 GHz tracking generator Front Panel Access Source Tracking Peak Chapter 5 307 NOTE NOTE NOTE Language Reference STATus Subsystem STATus Subsystem The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI defined status reporting structures Operation Condition Query STATus OPERation CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Status Operation Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Operation Enable STATus OPERation ENABle lt integer gt STATus OPERation
275. nted ona Page 262640226044 tass en e s seeded ies 247 Frid Pape IDE qo dap ede lc e a ao qos 248 TUE Larva d ee ee en een QE e xad bene es LM PERS 248 INI isle SUDUHBHI es 249 Continupus ar Single Measurements coniu oiaese4x s exeo GE ox qx e ban oed det do 249 Take New Data ACQUIGNIONS ARE tudes 250 ADT 250 1 idolo ln ee ee ee eee er re re ee ee er 250 LoscanestestoReseERRORTASER P DK ehe 251 Resume the Mesias RLIA RESP RE EE S sl cues 251 Contents 252 hpa Pon C DIE EES ECHO tii Eaa Ed e 252 Clear TOR ER IER e Ee E VOR EC bah 253 MEASure Group of Commands 254 Connew Commands 4 chess sees ss rno reese oae EEI 254 PCH Commands ees x ae tcx iedot beni A d 255 Mesue Commands 25244 ckocne macie deem doi b eei I Ree doen KR xe sel i eR we 255 256 257 uuu dad 04 Exo ERO CERE Ie o ee d 257 Configure for Measuring 257 EATER RE 258 Measure at Marker and Add to List re 258 Seting On or DIE RUE 258 Min VI SM IR aua aa obey ROC CHR RU EC RO Oed E ac ced ed ke 258 Mene XX Pe eS SACR d Ed 259 MTRTMETPCI A n 259 ub Ra uade oss 260 Catalog
276. ntended to teach you everything about the SCPI programming language 37 Programming Fundamentals The SCPI Consortium or IEEE can provide detailed information on the subject of SCPI programming Refer to IEEE Standard 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation New York NY 1987 or to IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Valid EMC Analyzer SCPI commands are used for examples in this chapter Topics included in this chapter are Creating Valid Commands Command Notation Syntax Special Characters in Commands Parameters in Commands Improving Measurement Speed Putting Multiple Commands on the Same Line Overview of GPIB Option A4H Overview of RS 232 Option 1AX Printer Setup and Operation 38 Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Creating Valid Commands Creating Valid Commands Commands are not case sensitive and there are often many different ways of writing a particular command These are examples of valid commands for a given command syntax Command Syntax SENSe BANDwidth RESolution freq Sample Valid Commands The following sample commands are all identical They will all cause the same result Sense Band Res 1700 BANDWIDTH RESOLUTION 1 7e3 sens band 1 7KHZ SENS band 1 7E3Hz e band 1 7kHz e bandwidth RE
277. o 0 This bit is always set to 0 Questionable Status Calibration Condition and Event Enable Registers The Questionable Status Calibration condition register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command Chapter 2 87 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition lt num gt positive transition where lt num gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Calibration Event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transition filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable CALibration EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 77 for an explanation of
278. o the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn printf Press Return to continue Mn scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main Program Variable viStatus viStatus 0 double dStartFreq 0 0 double dStopFreq 0 0 Chapter 3 109 Programming Examples Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search double dMarkerAmplitude 0 0 long lOpc 01 Open an GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp viESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Marker Delta Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Set the analyzer to single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 n Prompt the user for the start frequency printf Nt Enter the Start frequency in MHz The user enters the start frequency scanf 1f amp dStartFreq Prompt the user for the stop frequency printf Nt Enter the Stop frequency in MHz The user enters the stop frequency scanf S1f amp dStopFreq Set the analyzer to the values
279. od Demod Off Demod Time SENSe DEMod TIME time SENSe DEMod TIME Sets the time used for frequency domain demodulation Factory Preset and RST 500 ms Range 2 ms to 100 s Default Unit seconds Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod Demod Time Demod View SENSe DEMod VIEW STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DEMod VIEW STATe This command causes the demodulated signal to be displayed If FM Demod is on then the display scales the y axis in units of kHz The scale div is set with the command DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe PDIVision FREQuency freq if FM Demod is on If FM Demod is on then several functions are not available these include Log Lin display is always in linear Y Axis Units Marker Search functions Normalize Display Line Peak Excursion and Peak Threshold There is no effect when AM demodulation is used only applicable for FM demodulation Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks This command is not available when Demod is set to Off Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod FM Demod View Chapter 5 281 Language Reference SENSe DETector Subsection SENSe DETector Subsection Automatic Detection Type Selected SENSe DETector AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DETector AUTO Switches automatically to the optimum detection type for typical measurements using the current instrument settings The detector type is average if any of these are on Noise marker Band power mar
280. om menu keys allow you to specify printer characteristics such as PCL Level and printer color capability Auto Auto enables the analyzer to automatically attempt to identify the connected printer when the Print key is pressed or when Printer Type is set to Auto Chapter 1 Programming Fundamentals Printer Setup and Operation 6 Press Printer Type to access the Printer Type menu keys Press Auto to make the analyzer attempt to identify the connected printer When you press Auto the analyzer will respond in one of the three following ways The Print Setup menu will be displayed with the Auto key selected and no new message will be displayed in the display status line This indicates that the analyzer has successfully identified the connected printer and no further setup is required As long as Auto remains selected in the Printer Type menu the analyzer will attempt to identify the printer when the front panel Print key is pressed The Print Setup menu will be displayed with the Custom key selected and one of the following diagnostic messages will be displayed in the display status line Unknown printer Define Custom to set up printer No printer response Define Custom to set up printer Invalid printer response Define Custom to set up printer This indicates that the analyzer was unable to automatically identify the connected printer and Custom has been selected in the Printer Type menu Press Print Setup Define Custom to s
281. on integer STATus OPERation PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Operation Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Operation Event register when that bit has a positive transition 0 to 1 The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range Integer 0 to 32767 Preset the Status Byte STATus PRESet Sets bits in most of the enable and transition registers to their default state It presets all the Transition Filters Enable Registers and the Error Event Queue Enable It has no effect on Event Registers Error Event Queue ESE and SRE Registers as described in IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 Chapter 5 309 NOTE NOTE Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection STATus QUEStionable Subsection This subsection controls the SCPI defined status reporting structures Questionable Calibration Condition STATus QUEStionable CALibration CONDition This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Calibration Condition register The data in this register is continuously updated and reflects the current conditions Questionable Calibration Enable STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle integer STATus QUEStionable CALibration E
282. onds for EDGE triggering only Factory Preset and RST 1 us Range 0 3 us to 429 seconds Default Unit seconds Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Setup Edge Setup Gate Length 300 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection Time Gate Level Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LEVel HIGH LOW SENSe SWEep TIME GATE LEVe1 Selects the level of the gate signal this command is for LEVel triggering only Factory Preset and RST High Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Setup Level Setup Time Gate Polarity Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE POLarity NEGative POSitive SENSe SWEep TIME GATE POLarity Selects the polarity of the gate signal this command is for EDGE triggering only Factory Preset and RST Positive Front Panel Access Sweep Gate Edge Gate Slope Pos Neg Preset Time Gate Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE PRESet Presets the time gated spectrum analysis capability Remarks This command resets gate parameters to default values as follows Gate trigger type edge Gate polarity positive Gate delay 1 us Gate length 1 us Gate level high Control Time Gate Option 1D6 Only SENSe SWEep TIME GATE STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe SWEep TIME GATE STATe Turns time gating on or off Time gate cannot be turned on if external trigger delay is on Chapter 5 301 Language Reference SENSe SWEep Subsection
283. oothing re RA tetak bnina 332 Toce VU SUDEN cock ieie Ee 332 15 Contents Trace Math Subtract Prom Display LIB 333 Select Trace Display Mode 44S VAWAVAVCEENRTI CRETAM E THEE EPA 333 TRIS I cau 4 hn E E CER Sd d aeu o ah S RO e Rica 334 External Trigger Line Trigger Delay Valui 4 c5202cc02ees0saede0se0aeee anes 334 External Trigger Line Trigger Delay Enable 2 0 lt sscresescaseeseesaeevecd das 334 Beet Te d CC rr 334 There Ge E edd 335 LUN 336 Video Trigger Level Amplitude 336 Wied Treger uL od edu ME RS 337 DENT od er ne ee re DEEERESTIES EXE MI ee ee ne eee Dade 338 Select Power Umits of Measure 338 6 Agilent 8590 EMC Analyzers Programming Conversion Guide 16 Commands Alphabetical Listing ISOURSCPOWeODATToSSIog ample ogee pode ke REGE RR ERR REE RE XEPANS REIR REB REB PR ded 303 193 per cor 193 mid EE 196 193 PN CE SERO 193 VES usus ir idet d ta en deh idi debt dob de Be ee ee be had eit eee hae 194 r 194 p Ache ci CEA 194 TONS Sco eRe ke nq
284. or ocurred last command was not completed n exit 0 Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is completed or an error message has occurred viPrintf viESA SRE 96 viPrintf viESA ESE 35 n Configure the computer to respond to an interrupt Chapter 3 153 Programming Examples Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done install the handler and enable it vilnstallHandler viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ mySrqHdlr iAddress viEnableEvent viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ VI HNDLR VI NULL Send an undefined command to the device viPrintf viESA IDN n Wait for SRQ WaitForSRQ Pause 5 seconds to observe error message displayed on ESA Sleep 5000 Averaging the successive measurements Set video averaging to 80 sweeps Turn the avarage On viPrintf viESA SENS AVER TYPE LPOW SENS AVER COUN 80 SENS AVER STAT ON n Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is completed or an error message has occurred viPrintf viESA SRE 96 n viPrintf viESA ESE 35 Trigger the sweeps and set the OPC bit after the sweeps are completed viPrintf viESA INIT IMM OPC n Wait for SRQ WaitForSRQ Disable and uninstall the interrupt handler viDisableEvent viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ VI_HNDLR viUninstallHandler viESA VI EVENT SERVICE REQ mySrqHdlr iAddress Clear
285. ords may also be used in commands where they are applicable MINimum sets the parameter to the smallest possible value MAXimum sets the parameter to the largest possible value UP increments the parameter DOWN decrements the parameter Include the key word MINimum or MAXimum after the question mark in a query in order to return the numeric value of the key word Example query SENSE FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Variable Parameters ampl rel ampl The ampl amplitude parameter and the rel ampl relative amplitude parameter consist of a rational number followed by optional units Acceptable units for ampl include V mV dBm dBmV dBuV Watts W rel ampl units are given in dB 42 Chapter 1 angle file name freq integer number percent rel power string time Programming Fundamentals Parameters in Commands An angle parameter is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are degrees Acceptable units include DEG RAD A file name parameter is the name of your file including the full path The back slash that follows the drive colon C usually used in computer paths is not used in the SCPI command string A frequency parameter is a positive rational number followed by optional units The default unit is Hz Acceptable units include Hz kHz MHz GHz There are no units associated with an integer parame
286. ory MMEMory MDIRectory dir path where path is or Makes a directory or subdirectory in the specified path Example Make a directory in C V which is in instrument memory MMEMory MDIRectory Front Panel Access File Create Dir Store Load Save a Signal List MMEMory LOAD SIGNallist file name gt MMEMory STORe SIGNallist file name These commands are used to recall the signal list data from a disk or to save the signal list data to a disk Example MMEM LOAD SIGN A myfiles lis MMEM STOR SIGN A xfiles lis Remarks Signal list files should be saved with a 1is extension since this is the extension assumed by the file manager You can save signal list files under a different extension but you will not be able to load these files via the front panel keys The load command for a signal list behaves differently than the LOAD command for AMPCOR or limit lines For most kinds of instrument data the LOAD command performs a destructive read it replaces any existing data with the data from the disk The MEM LOAD SIGN command does an additive read it merges the data loaded with any data currently in the signal list Signal list files are stored in ASCII text files with section markers to delineate content The data in a signal list is stored in the DATA section of the file The contents of this section are described in the table below Column Conten
287. ould not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Set Y Axis units to dBm viPrintf viESA UNIT POW DBM n Set the analyzer center frequency to 50MHZ viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50e6 n Set the analyzer span to 50MHZ viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 50e6 n Display the program heading printf n t t Marker Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Set analyzer to single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Mn User enters the peak excursion value printf Nt Enter PEAK EXCURSION in dB Wyo scanf f amp fPeakExcursion Set the peak excursion viPrintf viESA CALC MARK PEAK EXC 1fDB n f PeakExcursion 106 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion Set the peak thresold viPrintf viESA CALC MARK PEAK THR 90 Mn Trigger a sweep and wait for completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM WAINn Set the marker to the maximum peak viPrintf viESA CALC MARK MAX Mn Query and read the marker frequency viQueryf viESA CALC MARK X n Slf amp dMarkerFreq printf n t RESULT Marker Frequency is 1f MHZ n n dMarkerFreg 10e5 Query and read the marker amplitude viQueryf viESA CALC M
288. ove this page and insert the wire O bound Programming Conversion Guide here Agilent Part Number E7401 90035 340 Chapter 6 Index Symbols CLS command 59 ESE command 70 SRE command 67 STB command 67 TST query 197 Numerics 3 dB bandwidth command 199 A abort command 198 250 ac input coupling command 252 Agilent Technologies URL 4 alignment all assemblies 197 229 commands 229 FM demodulation assembly 230 AM demodulation 280 on off 281 amplitude correction data merging 277 data setting 276 deleting 276 external amplifier 279 set deleting 278 set turning on off 278 setting interpolation 278 turning on off 276 maximizing input signal 297 scaling 240 annotation display 237 ASCII data format 243 assemblies aligning all 229 attenuation input resetting protection 253 setting 295 tracking generator 303 tracking generator auto on off 304 automeasure average on off 287 margin on off 289 peak on off 287 quasi peak on off 287 average detection 285 averaging dwell time setting 288 number of averages 269 on off automatic 270 automeasure 287 averaging 269 restart 269 smoothing trace data 330 type setting 271 B background alignment 230 band markers 219 set start frequency 225 set stop frequency 226 start frequency 227 stop frequency 227 bandpower marker 217 bandwidth measurement command 200 measurement command NdB results 199
289. page size 248 print now 247 printer type 245 prints per page 247 report 245 report content 245 screen dump report 248 setup 54 signal list 246 signal list delta 246 testing setup 56 programming commands creating valid 39 multiple commands on one line 48 notation syntax 40 parameters 42 separator syntax 48 special characters 41 terminations 48 programming errors debug information 323 programming examples list of 94 system requirements 95 using C language 96 99 346 Q quasi peak automeasure on off 287 detection 284 285 dwell time 288 fetch command 203 queries frequency reference 230 hardware configuration 321 host identification 323 identification 194 marker frequency counter 217 marker y axis 227 operation event 308 peaks frequency amplitude 330 number of 330 sort frequency amplitude 330 SCPI version 327 standard event status register 194 state 194 system configuration instrument 322 system options 324 questionable condition registers 73 questionable condition registers queries 310 quit command 198 R read command string format 257 read commands description 256 real number data format 243 recall IEEE command 195 reference calibration control 232 level normalized 239 offset 241 position normalized 239 y axis amplitude 240 registers event enable definition 59 event definition 59 negative transition definition 59 positive transit
290. par 224 CALCulate RE XXE RA GEH RE REGE ERE 224 X POSIBON xe E REOR doer eed RR Re Ra 224 CALCalate MARKer 1 21314 X POSition CEN Ter paran iesus 05000000045 Seba emet hx 225 CALCulate MARK 1 X POSIOUCENTGtT e Roc Ee E End em 225 CALCulate MARKer 1 21314 X POSition SPAN lt gt 223 CAL Culate BIX POSIN SPAN 225 CALCulate MARKer 1 2134 X POSition STARt lt gt 00 0 0 0 225 TIRSA A POSHO STARI cata cap deine bee ee CREER AC RE PESCE CERRO 225 STOP paratis RR Rr Rh web e Snc 226 CALCU MAREer T I2 3H X POSION STOP 42 eee Yu REST AR EAGRRR E 226 CALCulate M ABEer 1 253 BEN POSION 224 20 Commands Alphabetical Listing CALCulate MARKer 1 2134 X READout FREQuencyITIMEIITIMelPERiod 226 CALCulate MARKer 1 234 XC READOUL EYES EGER URN OR SARTO ER REA AO EO 226 ICATLCulate MARKer L 2IEEX SPAN c hoch Cee PRESE OH EG EROR ES 226 aia qas 4d qaot qopi ord Phe eGR ek oe Pa CR ERE ERA DESDE ds 226 CALCulate MAREKer 1 23MEX
291. pen a session to ASRL device at COM1 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument This will set number of sweep points to default of 401 viPrintf viESA RSTNn Display the program heading printf n t t Read in Trace Data using ASCII Format using RS 232 Program n n 2 Set the input port to the internal 50MHz reference source Route50MHzSignal 132 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 Query number of sweep points per trace firmware revision A 04 00 or later For firmware revisions prior to A 04 00 the number of sweep points is 401 iSwpPnts 401 viQueryf viESA SENSE SWEEP POINTS Wn d amp iSwpPnts Calculate number of bytes in the header The header consists of the i4 sign followed by a digit representing the number of digits to follow The digits which follow represent the number of sweep points multiplied by the number of bytes per point iHeaderBytes 3 iDataBytes gt 0 plus increment for and n iDataBytes iSwpPnts iBytesPerPnt lNumberBytes iDataBytes while iDataBytes iDataBytes 10 0 iHeaderBytes Set analyzer to single sweep mode viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Mn Set the analyzer to 50MHz center frequency viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ n Set the analyzer to 50MHz Span viPrintf viESA
292. plitude CALC MARK Y Close the session a vy y 7 ud y y i y a BRR RK RRR RRR RRR RRR KKK KR KKK KR KR KIRK RK EK KE KK KR KK include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt 108 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA 4411 strlen hpESA E4411B strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC E7401A strlen hpEMC 7401 if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4401B E4411B and E7401A viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON else For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output t
293. pointer to the session identifier for this particular device session This pointer will be used to identify this device session when using other VTL functions The following is an example of opening sessions with a GPIB multimeter and a GPIB VXI scanner ViSession defaultRM dmm scanner viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 22 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp dmm viOpen defaultRM GPIB VXI0 24 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp scanner viClose scanner viClose dmm viClose defaultRM Chapter 3 101 NOTE Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL The above function first opens a session with the default resource manager The session returned from the resource manager and a device address is then used to open a session with the GPIB device at address 22 That session will now be identified as dmm when using other VTL functions The session returned from the resource manager is then used again with another device address to open a session with the GPIB V XI device at primary address 9 and VXI logical address 24 That session will now be identified as scanner when using other VTL functions See the following section for information on addressing particular devices Addressing a Session As seen in the previous section the rsrcName parameter in the viOpen function is used to identify a specific device This parameter is made up of the VTL interface name and the device address The
294. quest 56 Chapter 1 Status Registers This chapter contains a comprehensive description of status registers explaining what status registers are and how to use them Information pertaining to all bits of the registers in Agilent EMC analyzers is also provided 57 Figure 2 1 Uncalibrated Integrity Status Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Programs often need to detect and manage error conditions or changes in analyzer status Agilent EMC products allow this function to be performed using status registers You can determine the state of certain analyzer hardware and firmware events and conditions by programming the status register system Refer to Figure 2 1 The status system is comprised of multiple registers arranged in a hierarchical order The service request enable register is at the top of the hierarchy and contains the general status information for the analyzer events and conditions The lower priority status registers propagate their data to the higher priority registers in the data structures by means of summary bits These registers are used to determine the states of specific events or conditions Status Register System Simplified Block Diagram Power Questionable Status Frequency Service Status Status Request Byte Enable Register Register Standard Calibration
295. r Negative Transition Filter A negative transition filter specifies the bits in the condition register that will set corresponding bits in the event register when the condition bit changes from 1 to 0 Positive Transition Filter A positive transition filter specifies the bits in the condition register that will set corresponding bits in the event register when the condition bit changes from 0 to 1 Event Register An event register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the positive and negative transition filters Bits in the event register are latched and once set they remain set until cleared by either querying the register contents or sending the CLS command Event Enable Register An event enable register specifies the bits in the event register that can generate a summary bit Summary bits are in turn used by the status byte register Chapter 2 59 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Figure 2 2 Overall Status Register System Diagram Status Byte Register STB STATus QUEStionable POWer Tripped Source Unleveled Source LO Unleveled LO Unleveled g i 50 MHz Osc Unleveled Message Available Reserved iji lo STATus Std Event Status Sum Input Overload Tripped B Unused 855 IE QUEStionable Req Serv Sum ROS 6 LO Out Unleveled SELES Operation Status Sum 7
296. r Next the summary bits are logically ANDed with the contents of the service request enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce the request service RQS bit in the status byte register How Do You Access the Status Registers There are two different methods to access the status registers Common Commands Accesses and Controls e Status Subsystem Commands Common Command Access and Control Most monitoring of the analyzer conditions is done at the highest level using the following IEEE common commands CLS clear status clears the status byte by emptying the error queue and clearing all the event registers ESE ESE event status enable sets and queries the bits in the enable register part of the standard event status register ESR event status register queries and clears the standard event status register OPC operation complete sets bit 0 in the standard event status register when all operations are complete SRE SRE service request enable sets and queries the value of the service request enable register STB status byte queries the value of the status byte register without erasing its contents Complete command descriptions are given in Chapter 5 Language Reference under the subsection entitled IEEE Common Commands on page 193 Chapter 2 61 NOTE Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions If you are using th
297. r message has occurred ESE 35 SRE 96 Send an illegal command to the ESA IDN illegal command When an interrupt occurs poll all instruments Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer Clear the analyzer status registers SRE 0 ESE 0 STAT QUES ENAB 0 Chapter 3 zi i f ay 7 id i ay oy v 7 f f v uli ay vy f ay 7 d v ud d v f ay ii 155 Programming Examples Determine if an Error has Occurred STAT QUES INT ENAB 0 CLS Continue monitoring for an interrupt Close the session J F F F F RR I He koe koe IKI IK IKI IK IK IKI eee include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include lt windows h gt include visa h define E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A define YIELD Sleep 10 ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 char cEnter 0 0 int iResult 0 int iSrqOccurred 0 char cBuf 3 0 Wait until SRQ is generated and for the handler to be called Print something while waiting When interrupt occurs it will be handled by interrupt handler void WaitForSRQ long lCount OL iSrqOccurred
298. r 50 2 75 Q External Amplifier Correction SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude rel ampl SENSe CORRection OFFSet MAGNitude A single value of amplitude correction can be applied to the displayed trace data to compensate for signal losses or gains that are due to other devices in the measurement setup rather than the unit under test Factory Preset and RST 0 dB Range 81 9 to 81 9 Default Unit dB Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Ext Amp Gain Chapter 5 279 Language Reference SENSe DEMod Subsection SENSe DEMod Subsection Type of Demodulation SENSe DEMod AM FM SENSe DEMod Sets the type of demodulation Factory Preset and RST AM Front Panel Access Det Demod Demod AM Det Demod Demod FM FM Deviation SENSe DEMod FMDeviation freq SENSe DEMod FMDeviation Sets the total FM frequency deviation for full screen demodulation Factory Preset and RST 100 kHz Range 5 kHz to 1 2 MHz Default Unit Hz Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Scale Div Squelch SENSe DEMod SQUelch integer Sets the squelch level on FM demod Factory Preset and RST integer 0 to 100 Key Access Det Demod Demod Audio Squelch 280 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe DEMod Subsection Demodulation Control SENSe DEMod STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe DEMod STATe Turns demodulation on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Det Dem
299. r each limit e x axis can be frequency or time values as specified by CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Frequencies are always in Hz Time is always in seconds No unit is allowed in this parameter e ampl amplitude values are in the current Y axis units No unit is allowed in this parameter connected connected values are either 0 or 1 A 1 means this point should be connected to the previously defined point to define the limit line A 0 means that it is a point of discontinuity and is not connected to the preceding point The connected value is ignored for the first point Range x axis 30 Gs to 30 Gs for time limits lt x axis gt 30 GHz to 350 GHz for frequency limits ampl 120 dBm to 100 dBm connected 0 or 1 Front Panel Access Display Limits X Axis Units Freq Time Delete Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DELete Deletes the selected limit line Display the Limit Line CALCulate 1 2 DISPlay OFF ON 0 1 CALCulate LLINe 1 2 DISPlay Controls the display of the current limit line Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access Display Limits Limit 112 Limit On Off Chapter 5 213 Language Reference CALCulate LLINe Subsection Test the Data Against the Limit Line CALCulate LLINe 1 2 FAIL Queries the status of the limit line testing Returns a 0 if the data passes and returns a 1 if there is a failure This query value is valid only if marg
300. r the sweep completion viPrintf viESA INIT IMM n viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10pc printf Program Abort Error occurred last command was not completed n exit 0 void main Program Variables ViStatus viStatus 0 double dFundamental 0 0 double dHarmFreg 0 0 float fHarmV 10 0 0 float fHarmDbm 10 0 0 float fRelAmptd 10 0 0 float fFundaAmptdDbm 0 0 double dFundaAmptdVz0 0 double dMarkerFreq 0 0 double dPrcntDistort 20 0 double dSumSquare 0 0 long lMaxHarmonic 01 long l1Num 0L Setting default values lMaxHarmonic 5 172 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 dFundamental 50 0 Open a serial session at COMI viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM if viStatus viOpen defaultRM ASRL1 INSTR VI NULL VI NULL amp viESA VI SUCCESS printf Could not open a session to ASRL device at COM1 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Display the program heading printf n t t Harmonic Distortion Program n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Prompt user for fundamental frequency printf t Enter the input signal fundamental frequency in MHz The user enters fundamental frequency scanf Sl amp dFundamental
301. re 2 2 The rest of this chapter lists the bits in each register shown in the figure along with descriptions of their purpose Chapter 2 65 Figure 2 4 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Status Byte Register Status Byte Register Diagram Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register ck763a The status byte register contains the following bits Bit Decimal Description Value 0 1 Unused This bit is always set to 0 1 2 Unused This bit is always set to 0 2 4 Error Event Queue Summery Bit in this bit position indicates that the SCPI error queue is not empty The SCPI error queue contains at least one error message 3 8 Questionable Status Summary Bit 1 in this bit position indicates that the questionable status summary bit has been set The questionable status event register can then be read to determine the specific condition that caused this bit to be set 4 16 Message Available MAV A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has data ready in the output queue There are no lower status groups that provide input to this bit 66 Chapter 2 NOTE Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 5 32 Standard Event Status Su
302. re at marker measure frequency or remeasure Key Access MEASURE More Auto Measure Auto Measure Peak On or Off SENSe EMI MEASure DETector PPEak STATe OFF 0 1 SENSe EMI MEASure DETector PPEak Sets automeasure peak On or Off Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Determines if the peak detector is measured by auto measure measure at marker measure frequency or remeasure Key Access MEASURE More Auto Measure Auto Measure Quasi Peak On or Off SENSe EMI MEASure DETector QPEak STATe OFF 0 1 SENSe EMI DETector QPEak Sets automeasure quasi peak On or Off Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Determines if the quasi peak detector is measured by auto measure measure at marker measure frequency or remeasure Key Access MEASURE More Auto Measure Chapter 5 287 Language Reference SENSe EMI Subsection Setting the Dwell Time for Peak SENSe EMI MEASure DETector PPEak DWELl time SENSe EMI MEASure DETector PPEak DWEL1 Sets the dwell time for the peak detector for Measure at Marker Automeasure and Remeasure Factory Preset and RST Off Remarks Sets the dwell time Setting the Dwell Time for Quasi Peak SENSe EMI MEASure DETector QPEak DWELl time SENSe EMI MEASure DETector QPEak DWEL1 Sets the dwell time for the quasi peak detector for Measure at Marker Automeasure and Remeasure Factory
303. re if stray event if eventType VI EVENT SERVICE REQ printf n Stray event type0x 1x n eventType Return successfully return VI SUCCESS Chapter 3 157 Programming Examples Determine if an Error has Occurred When an interrupt occurs determine which device generated the interrupt if an instrument other than the ESA generates the interrupt simply report Instrument at GPIB Address xxx Has Generated an Interrupt printf SRQ Event Occurred Wn printf Mn Original Device Session 1d n viESA Get the GPIB address of the insrument which has interrupted viQueryf viESA SYST COMM GPIB SELF ADDR n St cBuf printf Instrument at GPIB Address s Has Generated an Interrupt n cBuf Get the status byte If the ESA generated the interrupt determine the nature of the interrupt either a measurement is uncalibrated or an error message has occurred viQueryf viESA STAT QUES INT EVEN n d amp iStatusByte if 0x08 amp iStatusByte printf Nn SRQ message t Measurement uncalibrated n If the ESA generated the interrupt determine the nature of the interrupt did is the measurement complete or an error message occur viQueryf 1 ESR n d amp iStatusByte if iStatusByte 0 amp amp 0x01 amp iStatusByte printf n SRQ message t Measurement complete n else if iStatusByte 0 0x02 0x10 0
304. rument memory without re entering the license key The license key works with one particular instrument host ID only Query Instrument Options SYSTem OPTions Returns a list of the options that are installed It is a comma separated list such as 1DS 1D6 A4H A4J 1DN Front Panel Access System Show System 324 Chapter5 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem Power On Elapsed Time SYSTem PON ETIMe Returns the number of seconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was turned on for the very first time Front Panel Access System Show System Power On Time SYSTem PON TIME Returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since the analyzer was last turned on Power On Type SYSTem PON TYPE PRESet LAST SYSTem PON TYPE Sets the defined instrument conditions after a power on or Preset PRESet The instrument settings at power on will be either the factory preset or user preset as set by SYSTem PRESet TYPE FACTory USER LAST The instrument settings at power on will be the settings at the time of power down Factory Preset and RST The factory default is Preset This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Front Panel Access System Power On Preset Power On Last Preset Enable IF Video Sweep Output Ports SYSTem PORTs IFVSweep ENABle OFF ON 0 1 SYSTem PORTS IFVSweep ENABle This command enables
305. rupt on the ESA analyzer Pause 5 seconds to observe the analyzer Set the ESA to perform 80 video averages SENS AVER TYPE LPOW SENS AVER COUN 80 Chapter 3 id 7 ui ay 7 ui ay 7 ay vy id v d ay xJ v f 7 v d ay d v 149 Programming Examples Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done SENS AVER STAT ON Trigger a measurement and set OPC bit when done INIT IMM OPC Wait for the SRQ When an interrupt occurs poll all instruments Report the nature of the interrupt on the ESA analyzer Clear the status register enable SRE 0 Clear the status byte of the ESA CLS Close the session 4 ui wi d I FO I e He IK A e IK IKI KIKI IKI IORI IO I K k k eee k k include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include lt windows h gt include visa h define hpESA_IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA_IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A define YIELD Sleep 10 ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 ViAddr iAddress char int int char Wait until SRQ is generated and for the handler to
306. s number of 330 query 330 sorting 330 signals clear marks 204 comment set for all 205 for current 205 for marked 205 cursor to signal list 207 delete all 205 demodulated displaying 281 marking 206 retrieve current specified 206 retrieve from signal list 206 signal list parameters 208 sort key 207 tracking 223 single vs continuous measurement mode 249 259 sort key specifying 207 source calibration internal 232 internal tracking generator commands 303 See also tracking generator span full scale 292 marker type 219 markers values 226 to previous 292 value 291 speaker on off 327 special characters in commands 41 squelch 280 SRE command description 61 SRQ command 196 SRQ using 63 standard event status byte enable and read 193 status event enable register description 70 status register query 194 status register description 68 start frequency 292 start measurement 197 states setting amplitude correction 276 amplitude correction set 278 automatic averaging 270 automatic detection type 282 Index 347 Index averaging on off 269 loading from file 262 max min view 258 query 194 recall 195 resolution BW automatic 272 resolution BW type 275 save 196 tracking generator output 267 status byte clearing 193 IEEE command 196 register 66 status command using 64 status registers commands 61 descriptions 57 59 operation condition register
307. s byte register This register also monitors the current measurement state and checks to see if the analyzer is performing any of these functions measuring calibrating 70 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions sweeping waiting for a trigger Figure 2 8 Status Operation Register Diagram CALibrating Reserved Reserved SWEeping MEASuring Waiting for TRIGger Reserved Reserved Paused Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Always Zero 0 Qperation Status 15 14 13 12 1110987654321 0 Operationstaus Y Y Y Y Y Y V Y Y Y Y V Y Y v Y Filter 15 14 13 12 11109 87 654 321 0 A TES Negative 15 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210 Transition Filter R Y V V Y Y Y YvY Y Y v Y Y YM 15 14 13 12 131 10987 654 32 1 0 273 LO Operation Status Event Register Operation Status Event Enable Register i ak O1 CE o To Status Byte Register Bit 7 cl76a Chapter 2 71 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions The STATus OPERation condition register contains the following bits Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Calibrating A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer is performing a self calibration 1 2 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with
308. screen image storing 265 signal list loading 263 signal list storing 263 trace loading from file 262 trace storing 266 FM demodulation type 280 deviation 280 FM demodulation on off 281 form feed printer 247 format data 243 frequency calculate correction at 200 center 290 configure 257 domain type 298 optimization phase noise 293 phase noise auto manual 294 reference adjustment coarse 231 adjustment fine 231 calibration on off 231 scaling 240 span full 292 marker type 219 previous 292 value 291 start 202 step size 290 291 stop 293 G gate trigger delay trigger to open 300 edge level 302 length EDGE triggering 300 level 296 level level triggering 301 on off 301 polarity EDGE triggering 301 preset EDGE triggering 301 GPIB address 319 command statements 50 instrument types 50 overview 50 graticule display 237 Index 343 Index H handshake RS 232 bus 52 hardcopy output 245 hardware configuration query 321 hardware configuration display 321 host identification query 323 I identification of host 323 identification query 194 IEEE commands ESR 194 IDN 194 SAV 196 common commands 193 IEEE common commands 48 IF sweep output on off 325 impedance mismatch correction 279 initiate measurement 197 input attenuation 295 configuration 319 coupling command 252 power maximizing 297 signal measuring 268 input
309. section Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Attenuation Input Port Power Gain SENSe POWer RF GAIN STATe OFF ON 0 1 SENSe POWer RF GAIN STATe Turns the internal preamp on or off Factory Preset and RST Off Front Panel Access AMPLITUDEJ Y Scale Int Preamp On Off Input Port Maximum Mixer Power SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer ampl SENSe POWer RF MIXer RANGe UPPer Specifies the maximum power at the input mixer Factory Preset and RST 10 dBm Range 100 dBm to 10 dBm Default Unit dBm Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Max Mixer Lvl Optimize Preselector Frequency SENSe PADJust lt freq gt SENSe POWer PADJust This command allows user defined adjustment of the preselector frequency to optimize its response on the signal of interest Factory Preset and RST 0 Hz Range 250 MHz to 250 MHz Default Unit None Use the MHz terminator in order for this command to work 296 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference SENSe POWer Subsection Remarks This command is available only on Agilent EMC models E7403A E7404A and E7405A Use this command for signals close to the noise level multiple signals close together or for other conditions when the preselector is not tuned to the frequency of interest Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Presel Adjust Preselector Center
310. sion viClose viESA viClose defaultRM Chapter 3 129 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 e koe I RI e He IK IK IK IIR IK IK eode eee ex f Reading Trace Data using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 This example is for the E44xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens an RS 232 session at COM1 COM2 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Query for the number of sweep points for firmware revision A 04 00 and later Default is 401 SENS SWE POIN Calculate the number of bytes in the header Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Sets the analyzer center frequency and span to 50 MHz SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHZ Specify 10 dB per division for the amplitude scale in and dBm Units DISP WIND TRAC Y SCAL PDIV 10 dB UNIT POW DBM Set the analyzer trace data to 32 bit Real FORM DATA REAL 32 Set the binary order to swap FORM BORD SWAP Trigger a sweep INIT IMM Check for operation complete OPC Calculate the number of bytes in the trace
311. sizer in the source tracking generator is unlocked 1 2 Freq Ref Unlocked A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer frequency reference is unlocked 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 4 16 Synth Unlocked A in this bit position indicates that the analyzer synthesizer is unlocked 5 32 Invalid Span or A 1 this bit position indicates an invalid span or bandwidth during frequency count 6 64 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 7 128 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 8 256 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but are for future use with other Agilent products 9 512 Demodulation A lin this bit position indicates an invalid span during FM Demodulation and Listen measurements 10 1024 Unused This bit is always set to 0 1 2048 Unused This bit is always set to 0 12 4096 Unused This bit is always set to 0 13 8192 Unused This bit is always set to 0 14 16384 Unused This bit is always set to 0 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 Chapter 2 81 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Questionable Status Frequency Condition a
312. solute values or relative values In fixed the limit line amplitude values are specified in absolute amplitude and do not depend on the reference level In relative the limit line amplitude values are relative to the current reference level For Fixed Frequency Parameters The frequency values in a limit line table are fixed values and the limit line is positioned accordingly Fixed limit lines are specified in absolute frequency and do not depend upon the center frequency values For Relative Frequency Parameters The frequency values in a limit line table are relative values and positions the limit line relative to the center frequency settings Relative limit lines are specified in relative frequency and are positioned with respect to the current center frequency When the current center frequency value is changed the segment frequencies are converted according to the current center frequency value For Time Parameters Limit lines that are based on sweep time are always relative to the start time The horizontal position of the limit line is not affected by this command Front Panel Access Display Limits Limits Fixed Rel Set Limit Line X axis Units CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain FREQuency TIME CALCulate LLINe CONTrol DOMain Selects how the limit line segments are defined according to frequency or according to the sweep time setting of the spectrum analyzer Changing this setting deletes all existing limit
313. st be used in a normal condition in which all means for protection are intact only Always use the three prong AC power cord supplied with this product Failure to ensure adequate grounding may cause product damage Warranty This Agilent Technologies instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent Technologies and Agilent Technologies shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent Technologies from another country Agilent Technologies warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent Technologies for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Agilent Technologies does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or
314. stem Show System Chapter 5 323 NOTE Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem License Key Install Application Option SYSTem LKEY lt option gt license key SYSTem LKEY lt option gt This command enters the license key required for installing the specified new application or option The query returns a string that contains the license key for a specified application or option that is already installed in the instrument The license key will also be returned if the application is not currently in memory but had been installed at some previous time Example SYST LKEY BAC 123A456B789C An option is a three character string that specifies the option or application that is to be installed as found in the Ordering Guide for example BAH for GSM Measurement Personality The option name must be enclosed in quotes A license key is a 12 character hexadecimal string given with the option The license key is unique to a specific option installed in the instrument with a specific host ID as returned by SYST HID The license key must be enclosed in quotes Front Panel Access System Licensing Delete a License Key SYSTem LKEY DELete option This command allows you to delete the license key from instrument memory for the selected option In general deleting the license key number is not recommended If the license key is deleted you will be unable to reload or update the application in inst
315. string must contain a valid frequency string The rule applied to ADD strings is that values need to be provided only as far to the right as a non default value is used For example the data format to add a signal at 1 MHz can be indicated as a frequency only The two commands below are equivalent The remaining fields are set to their default values CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD 1e6 or CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD 1000000 If the frequency and a comment are desired the missing fields between the frequency and comment position must be shown by marking the positions using the comma separator Either type of quote delimiting is available The preceding example would be expressed as CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD le6 This is my comment or CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD le6 This is my comment 202 Chapter5 NOTE Language Reference CALCulate EMI SLISt Subsection If a mark were desired in the above example the command would be CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD le6 1 This is my comment The Mark and detector fields allow human readable input forms CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD 1e6 0n This is my comment If an amplitude value is provided in the format string the associated detector flag is automatically turned on unless explicitly turned off in the same data format string For example CALCulate EMI SLISt ADD 1e6 10000 0n This provides a peak detector amplitude and turns the mark flag on The pe
316. t If INITiate CONTinuous is on continuous measure new continuous measurement begins immediately The INITiate and TRIGger subsystems contain additional related commands Front Panel Access Restart for continuous measurement mode 198 Chapter 5 NOTE Language Reference CALCulate Subsystem CALCulate Subsystem This subsystem is used to perform post acquisition data processing In effect the collection of new data triggers the CALCulate subsystem In this instrument the primary functions in this subsystem are markers and limits NdBpoints CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth NDB rel ampl CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth NDB Selects the power level below the peak of the signal at which the signal bandwidth will be measured by the markers CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe must be ON To query the result of NdBpoints use the command CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth RESult Factory Preset and RST 3 dB Range 80 dB to 1 dB Default Unit dB Remarks Refer to CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe for an explanation of this marker function Front Panel Access Peak Search or Search N dB Points NdBresults CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth RESult Returns the measured bandwidth at the power level defined by CALCulate BWIDth NDB 100 is returned if CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe is off or when a result is not available Refer to CALCulate BWIDth BANDwidth STATe for an explan
317. t include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include lt visa h gt define hpESA IDN E4401B Hewlett Packard E4401B define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B ddefinehpEMC E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 long lOpc 0L Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401B strlen hpESA E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4411B strlen hpESA E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4411B E4401B viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON n Chapter 3 171 Programming Examples Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 else For the analyzers having frequency limits 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT Mn print 5 2 08 4 Press Return to continue n scanf c amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON n void TakeSweep Take a sweep and wait fo
318. t Inverse Time Marker Readout Period Span Markers Span X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X SPAN Change the frequency span of the designated span type marker pair to position the markers at the desired trace X values The value is in the X axis units which is usually frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE SPAN to select span markers The query returns the current X value frequency span of the designated markers If span markers are not selected the query returns the latest marker reading as a span always positive 226 Chapter5 Language Reference CALCulate MARKer Subsection Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker active marker Span Pair Delta Pair Markers Start Frequency X Value CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STARt lt param gt CALCulate MARKer 1 2 3 4 X STARt Position the start reference frequency of the designated band type marker pair at the specified trace X value The value is in the X axis units which is often frequency or time Use CALCulate MARKer MODE BAND to select band markers The query returns the current X value start reference frequency of the designated marker Default Unit Matches the units of the trace on which the markers are positioned Front Panel Access Marker active marker Delta Pair Delta Pair Markers Stop Frequency X Value CA
319. t the operation status summary bit bit 7 of the status byte register to 1 Send the STATus OPERation ENABle num command where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable For example to enable bit 9 and bit 3 so that whenever either bit 9 or 3 is set to 1 the operation status summary bit of the status byte register will be set to 1 send the STATus OPERation ENABle 520 512 8 command The STATus OPERat ion 1 command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the STATus OPERation ENABle lt num gt command STATus QUEStionable Registers STATus QUEStionable registers monitor the overall analyzer condition They are accessed with the STATus OPERationand STATus QUEStionable commands inthe STATus command subsystem The STATus QUEStionable registers also monitor the analyzer to see if there are any questionable events that occurred These registers look for anything that may cause an error or that may induce a faulty measurement Signs of a faulty measurement include the following hardware problems e out of calibration situations unusual signals Chapter 2 73 NOTE Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions All bits are summary bits from lower level event registers For a general diagram of the STATus QUEStionable register see Figure 2 9 A Questionable Status condition register
320. t Enable Reg Service Request Enable Register SRE SRE STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated STATus QUEStionable INTegrity Oversweep Meas Uncal Signal Ident On Reserved Unused Reserved Reserved Reserved Data Uncalibrated Summary Unused S l IF ADC Over Range m Unused E 24 2 14 Unused Fes 2 Reserved iri os Unused c elel s Reserved Unused S S S Reserved 5 Efe Unused g FSS Reserved gt 4 o 1 tu Unused 8 2 Reserved b Unused Reserved Unused Invalid Data Unused Unused Always Zero 0 Reserved Reserved Always Zero 0 d75a 60 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Status registers except for the status byte register and the standard event status register consist of the registers whose contents can be used to produce status summary bits These summary bits are then manipulated as follows The condition register passes summary bits to the negative and positive transition filters after which they are stored in the event register The contents of the event register are logically ANDed with the contents of the event enable register and the result is logically ORed to produce a status summary bit The status summary bit is then passed to the status byte register either directly or through the STATus QUEStionable registe
321. ta Set Ready and Clear to Send modem lines to be sure they are active 3 Send information to the interface and thence to the peripheral 4 After data transfer is complete clear Data Terminal Ready and Request to Send signals For ENTER operations 1 Set Data Terminal Ready line to active state Leave Request to Send inactive 2 Check Data Set Ready and Data Carrier Detect modem lines to be sure they are active 3 Input information from the interface as it is received from the peripheral 4 After the input operation is complete clear the Data Terminal Ready signal Data Transfer Errors The serial interface can generate several types of errors when certain conditions are encountered while receiving data from the peripheral device Errors can be generated by any of the following conditions Parity error The parity bit on an incoming character does not match the parity expected by the receiver This condition is most commonly caused by line noise Framing error Start and stop bits do not match the timing expectations of the receiver This can occur when line noise causes the receiver to miss the start bit or obscures the stop bits Overrun error Incoming data buffer overrun caused a loss of one or more data characters This is usually caused when data is received by the interface but no ENTER statement has been activated to input the information Break received A BREAK was sent to the interface by the peripheral device The
322. tart Meas Control Restart Resume the Measurement INITiate RESume This command applies to measurements found in the MEASURE menu Use this command to resume the current measurement by changing the current measurement state from the paused state back to the wait for trigger state Front Panel Access Meas Control Resume Chapter 5 251 CAUTION Table 5 4 Language Reference INPut Subsystem INPut Subsystem The INPut subsystem controls the characteristics of analyzer input ports Input Port Coupling INPut COUPling AC DC INPut COUPling Selects ac or dc coupling for the front panel INPUT port A blocking capacitor is switched in for the ac mode Instrument damage can occur if there is a dc voltage present at the INPUT and dc coupling is selected Factory Preset and RST ac Remarks This command is available only on Agilent EMC analyzer models E7402A Option UKB E7405A Option UKB E7403A or E7404A Selecting Input Coupling Model Number AC Frequency Range DC Frequency Range E7402A with Option UKB 100 kHz to 3 GHz 100 Hz to 3 GHz E7403A 100 kHz to 6 7 GHz 9 kHz to 6 7 GHz E7403A with Option UKB 100 kHz to 6 7 GHz 100 Hz to 6 7 GHz E7404A 100 kHz to 13 2 GHz 9 kHz to 13 2 GHz E7404A with Option UKB 100 kHz to 13 2 GHz 100 Hz to 13 2 GHz E7405A with Option UKB 10 MHz to 26 5 GHz 100 Hz to 26 5 G
323. tatusByte return VI_SUCCESS Main Program void main Program Variables ViStatus viStatus 0 long 10 0 Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM int address 18 viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIBO 18 VI_NULL VI_NULL amp ViESA if viStatus 152 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Clear the status byte of the instrument viPrintf viESA CLS n Display the program heading printf n t Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done n n Put the analyzer in a single sweep viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Set the analyzer to 50MHz center frequency viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHz n Set the analyzer resolution bandwidth to 300 Khz viPrintf viESA SENS BAND RES 300 KHz n Set the analyzer to 10MHz span viPrintf viESA SENS FREQ SPAN 10MHz n Trigger a sweep viPrintf viESA INIT IMM n Make sure the previous command has been completed viQueryf viESA OPC n d amp 10 if 10pc printf Program Abort err
324. te of Analyzer Events and Conditions 58 Wisata the Status i d E a EG ERR REGENS 59 How De Yon Access the Registers RO as 61 Using the Service Request SRO Method 63 o qus dab ob odas a ec Robe qood dox aad aid 63 Setting and Querying the Status Register 2 pha 65 Details or 65 alnus Byle i ae ee ee ee er EE PCR E Vd cr Ex eee a 66 Service Kegnest Enable Register 67 Standard Bent Status Register Leod exakt on HEAR RR UE ARR bfc ds 68 Contents standard Event Status Event Enable Register 70 SIATusOPERaBon Register 70 STATus OPERation Condition and Event Enable Registers 73 SLATus QUESBonable Registers 23 STATusQUESBonsble PO Wer R gister 76 Questionable Status Event Enable des 77 Questionable Status Power Condition and Event Registers 79 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency Register HERES 80 Questionable Status Frequency Condition and Event Enable Registers 82 STATus QUEStionable CALibration Register 83 STATus QUEStionable INTegrity UNCalibrated Register
325. ter A number parameter is a member of the set of positive or negative intriguers and including zero Fractional numbers are included in the number parameter There are no units associated with a number parameter A percent parameter is a rational number between 0 and 100 with no units A relative power parameter is a positive rational number followed by optional units The default units are dB Acceptable units are dB only A string parameter includes a series of alpha numeric characters A time parameter is a rational number followed by optional units The default units are seconds Acceptable units include S MS US Block Program Data Definite length arbitrary block response data is defined in section 8 7 9 2 of IEEE Standard 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands for Use with ANSI IEEE Std 488 1 1987 New York NY 1992 definite length block Allows data to be transmitted over the system Chapter 1 interface as a series of 8 bit data bytes This element is particularly useful for sending large quantities of data 8 bit extended ASCII codes or other data that are not able to be directly displayed A definite length block of data starts with an ASCII header that begins with and indicates how many additional data points are following in the block For example if the header is 512320 then interpret the header as follows The first digit in the header 5 represents how many
326. ters to the default values It uses the settings from the last measurement Initiates the measurement and puts valid data into the output buffer If a measurement other than the current one is specified the instrument will switch to that measurement before it initiates the measurement and returns results Blocks other SCPI communication waiting until the measurement is complete before returning the results If the optional n value is not included or is set to 1 the scalar measurement results will be returned If the n value is set to a value other than 1 the selected trace data results will be returned See each command for details of what types of scalar results or trace data results are available The binary data formats should be used when handling large blocks of data since they are smaller and faster then the ASCII format 256 Chapter5 Language Reference MEASure Group of Commands Measurement settings persist if you initiate a different measurement and then return to a previous one Use READ lt measurement gt if you want to use those persistent settings If you want to go back to the default settings use MEASure lt measurement gt Get Measurement Results FETCH Returns the results of the last measurement Factory Preset and RST Not affected by RST or Preset Remarks Only returns data if a measurement has been made Returns the results of the measurement as a string Read Command READ Performs configure
327. that the present trace data does not reflect the existing analyzer state Trigger a new sweep and or measurement 13 8192 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 14 16384 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 15 32768 Always Zero 0 This bit is always set to 0 90 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Questionable Status Integrity Event Condition and Enable Registers The Questionable Status Integrity Condition Register continuously monitors the calibration status of the analyzer Condition registers are read only To query the condition register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity CONDition The response will be the decimal sum of the bits which are set to 1 The transition filter specifies which types of bit state changes in the condition register will set corresponding bits in the event register The changes may be positive from 0 to 1 or negative from 1 to 0 Send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity NTRansition num negative transition or STATus QUEStionable INTegrity PTRansition num positive transition where num is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable The Questionable Status Integrity Event Register latches transition events from the condition register as specified by the transi
328. the Selected Memory Location cheeses ee uu Ae rA ER 260 LM a FE ios Li adr Rr b XV AER UR HD IE ORNA ER RR GF RERO IE TIERE OR E et 260 Novus Dato Pale ecto aues Ed Wii bee EO EO bh bo eda dado ds 261 acie ad edo dC ROGO ROC cerne aodio PR IO OC CHOC GERE YO RON 261 Load a Corrections Table from a File 0 0 0 eens 261 Load a Limit Line from Memory to the Instrument 0 0 0 0 00 000 261 Load an Instrument State froma File 0 0 0 ccc 262 Load a Trace From a File to the e Rs 262 Make a DECOY 263 Store Load Save a Signal List ER FER 263 Rd cr Decoy ETC 264 Store a Corrections Table toa File lllllleeeeeee e 264 mente a Linn Line BUR DIS a caos REDE pm m dulce Eee ed REOR n dodo end REOS 265 Store Measurement Results File eee y 265 Store a Screen Image in a Graphic Fil 2 454264 lt 44eGeesseuiieansdeeveweus 265 Store an Instrument State in a Fe 265 cies vun QU eru be 266 CL EV Suba a ET POPE 267 Torr I OE iouis dedos Gp d qd 267 SENSE EX RE d p 268 SENS F AVERAES SECON 44 dab d ARCA 654546560 OCA e OHS SRS 269 Clear We iA o Fico Mer kG See ok ee eh eee eee kad 269 Ole ACES COUN MT 269 OWON ci ch Res PO DRE REC 2
329. tion filters Event registers are destructive read only Reading data from an event register will clear the content of that register To query the event register send the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity EVENt See Questionable Status Event Enable Register on page 77 for an explanation of how to set the summary bit using the event enable register In this case use the command STATus QUEStionable INTegrity ENABle lt num gt Chapter 2 91 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions 92 Chapter 2 Programming Examples This chapter includes examples of how to program the analyzer using the analyzer SCPI programming commands Twelve examples are written for an analyzer with an GPIB interface Option A4H Three examples are written for an analyzer with an RS 232 interface Option 1AX 93 Programming Examples List of Programming Examples List of Programming Examples The programming examples included in this chapter are 94 Using Marker Peak Search and Peak Excursion Using Marker Delta Mode and Marker Minimum Search Performing Internal Self alignment Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format GPIB Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format RS 232 Using Limit Lines Measuring Noise Entering Ampli
330. to their factory defaults This command is persistent The term persistent means that the command retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Range Integer 0 to 30 Front Panel Access System Remote Port Serial Port DTR Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol DTR OFF ON IBFull SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol Sets the hardware pacing scheme Only one Option 1AX can be installed in an instrument Off holds the DTR line in the unasserted off condition On holds the DTR line in the asserted on condition IBFull selects the input buffer full mode for the DTR line The IBFull parameter sets the DTR line to indicate when the device is ready to receive When the number of received bytes in the input buffer of the device reaches the stop threshold the device will unassert the DTR line When the number of bytes has been reduced to the start threshold the device will assert DTR indicating that it can receive input again The device will also monitor the state of CTS and will stop transmission if the line becomes unasserted Factory Preset Chapter 5 319 Language Reference SYSTem Subsystem no RST The factory default is On This parameter is persistent which means that it retains the setting previously selected even through a power cycle Serial Port RTS Setup SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol RTS OFF ON IBFull SYSTem COMMunicate SERial 1 CONTrol RTS S
331. ton ID6 Only RE RR UAR RE USE es 301 Time Gate Polarity Option EDO OUO acess es qua 301 Preset Time Gate Option 06 00 301 Control Time Gate Option IDG 301 Tune Gate Trigger Type Option 1D6 Only PR EC bebe 302 SOURCE 64 i4654 0545042 bos Gh SETS ERU PE Ss KEN SKS a SE ETERS So QE RE 303 pets the Output Power Offset ous ides xa edo rea dei Kia codd dues 303 ace baa EATA RA 303 Automate Source Attenuation esis tde ttt EE XY PER eds 304 Sels ihe Output POS Poir ERST COE RE ip ais edad eqeeEbbueeqidest 304 Sets the Source Output Power Mode ccciccicacteeasuasceeestddeseteenndows 305 Set the Source Sweep Power Range 305 13 Contents 14 set the Output Power at Start af the SWOel 306 Set the Output Power to Step Automatically 306 Set the Output Power Step 5 306 Set tbe Sweep Power Rang 307 Power Tracking cesseosqosedeesqusdercsus bear EENETI PEII ROTIE SARE 307 Power Tracking Peak Lco sexe vay 307 SOD eis 308 th 308 Operation Enable 22254 os dd S hd be de hd E Ada Td edic ed pee e Rud eee eS 308 R4 WARE PED PREX TER Q
332. ts 1 Row number starts at 1 2 Frequency Hz 3 Peak detector amplitude dBmV 4 Quasi peak detector amplitude dBmV 5 Average detector amplitude dBmV 6 Total amplitude correction dBm Chapter 5 263 Language Reference MMEMory Subsystem Column Contents 7 Comment enclosed in double quotes 8 Marked unmarked state O2unmarked 1 marked 9 Uncertainty MHz 10 Status word used internally 11 Peak delta from limit line 1 12 Peak delta from limit line 2 13 Quasi peak delta from limit line 1 14 Quasi peak delta from limit line 2 15 Average delta from limit line 1 16 Average delta from limit line 2 a An asterisk in the column indicates that the data was missing or not applicable at the time the signal list data was saved to disk Front Panel Access File Save Signal List File Load Signal List Delete a Directory MMEMory RDIRectory dir name Deletes the specified directory and all files and subdirectories within that directory Front Panel Access File Delete Store a Corrections Table to a File MMEMory STORe CORRection ANTenna CABLe USER lt file name gt Stores the specified correction set to the file named lt file_name gt Example MMEM STOR CORR ANT A TEST1 ANT Remarks This command will fail if the ile name already exists Front Panel Access File Save Type Corrections 264 Chapter5 Language Reference MMEMor
333. ts that will be smoothed in TRACe MATH SMOoth See that command for an explanation of how smoothing is performed Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution If the number of points is an even number then the number of points is increased by one If the number of points is larger than the number of sweep points then the number of sweep points is used unless the number of sweep points is even in which case the number of points will be the sweep points minus one The number of points smoothed is always an odd number Range Integer 3 to current number of sweep points Trace Math Subtract TRACe MATH SUBTract lt destination trace gt lt source tracel gt lt source trace2 gt Subtracts the magnitude of the two source traces trace 1 trace 2 and places the result in the destination trace Destination traces are TRACEII2l3 Source traces are TRACE11213 Example TRAC MATH SUBT TRACE3 TRACE3 TRACE2 is equivalent to trace 3 trace 3 trace 2 332 Chapter 5 Language Reference TRACe Subsystem Trace Math Subtract From Display Line TRACe MATH SUBTract DLINe trace Subtracts the magnitude of the display line from the selected trace and places the result back in the selected trace Trace is 23 Example TRAC MATH SUBT DLIN TRACE1 is equivalent to tracel trace 1 display line Front Panel Access View Trace Operations 2 DL
334. tton and type in the following VXIPNP WIN95 LIB MSC For Borland C version 4 0 compilers You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths They are set under the Options Project menu selection Double click on Directories from the Topics list box and add the following VXIPNP WIN95 INCLUDE C VXIPNP WIN95 LIB BC 16 bit Applications The following is a summary of important compiler specific considerations for the Windows compiler For Microsoft Visual C version 1 5 98 To set the memory model do the following 1 SelectOptions Project 2 Click on the Compiler button then select Memory Model from the Category list 3 Click on the Model list arrow to display the model options and select Large 4 Click on OK to close the Compiler dialog box You may wish to add the include file and library file search paths They are set under the Options Directories menu selection VXIPNP WIN INCLUDE VXIPNP WIN LIB MSC Otherwise the library and include files should be explicitly specified in the project file Chapter 3 Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL Example Program This example program queries a GPIB device for an identification string and prints the results Note that you must change the address if something other than the EMC default value of 18 is required idn c program filename include visa h include lt stdio h gt void m
335. tude Correction Data Status Register Determine When a Measurement is Done Determine if an Error has Occurred Measuring Harmonic Distortion GPIB Measuring Harmonic Distortion RS 232 Making Faster Measurements multiple measurements Chapter 3 Programming Examples Programming Examples System Requirements Programming Examples System Requirements These examples were written for use on an IBM compatible PC configured as follows Pentium processor Windows 9561 or Windows 4 0 operating system C programming language National Instruments GPIB interface card for analyzers with Option A4H National Instruments VISA Transition Libraries VTL COMI serial port configured as follows for analyzers with Option 1AX 9600 baud 8 data bits stop bit no parity bits hardware flow control A HP Agilent 82341C card may be substituted for the National Instruments GPIB and the HP VISA libraries may be substituted for the National Instruments VISA Transition Libraries If substitutions are made the subdirectories for the include and library files will be different than those listed in the following paragraphs Refer to the documentation for your interface card and the VISA libraries for details 1 Microsoft is a U S registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation Chapter 3 95 Programming Examples C Programming Examples using VTL C Programming Examples using VTL
336. u ease dole RGU Se RE RT LOSES Gre RE dde de Pied Rp Rb de 309 STATus QUEStG onable CALibration CONDiflon 7 266 cccc cece bused bass 310 26 Commands Alphabetical Listing STATus QUEStonable CAL ibratiomENABl e eintepers 6 04 ccc cs she Rete AR ERR ERE ER RR ACER DA RR 310 STATus QUEStionable CALibration ENABle A ER 310 STATus QUEStionable CALibration NTRansition integer ee eh 311 STATus DUEStonable CALibraion N TRansitidtl amp suck ieakbie bc CR oken D RR CER RES 311 STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition lt integer gt 1 2 runerne renren eh 311 STATus QUEStionable CALibration PTRansition err 311 STATus QUESt onable CALibraton EVENTI sich oboe oi eos 310 SIADuwOUESgonable C ONLIUON aio eect ose Ed ET eRe ORR TER ee Re RS E Ed RA RR 311 SEATus DUEStonibIe ENABIS CINSBEIS Se AX RI RR AG GG UR ARE 312 iA Tis UE Song ble PN ARIE Ra iK ipa ba poi p ddr key 312 STATus OUESUonable PREOQUency C ONDIDUONT iiis uses aae 312 S LATas QUES Gonable PREQuency ENADBlG integer 2 veto ye Yer ed rare i ER eed 315 S STATus QUESGOnable PREQuency ENABIG EX Yu ERR E EX EY RA 313 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition integer y Rd 315 STATus QUEStionable FREQuency NTRansition 0 2 0 eee ec ene eee hh 313 ST
337. ual limits when initially set For example if the reference level is first set to 20 dBm then the reference level offset can be set to values of 307 6 dB to 327 6 dB In the case of a 327 6 dB reference level offset the resultant reference level value changes to 307 6 dBm The reference level value range can be initially set to values from 149 9 to 55 dBm Setting the reference level offset value first yields the following If the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB then the reference level can be set to values of 327 6 to 25 dBm The reference level is clamped at 25 dBm because its positive value of 55 dBm is reached at 25 dBm with an offset of 30 dB Its own positive amplitude limit applies If the reference level offset is first set to 30 dB then the reference level can be set to values of 327 6 to 85 dBm Again the positive amplitude limit of reference level alone is factored in to the resultant combined limit 241 Language Reference DISPlay Subsystem Front Panel Access Amplitude Y Scale Ref Level Offst Vertical Axis Scaling DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe SPACing LINear LOGarithmic DISPlay WINDow TRACe Y SCALe SPACing Specifies the vertical graticule divisions as log or linear units Factory Preset and RST Logarithmic Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Scale Type Log Lin 242 Chapter5 NOTE NOTE Language Reference FORMat Subsystem FORMat S
338. ubsystem The FORMat subsystem sets a data format for transferring numeric and array information TRACe DATA and TRACe are affected by FORMat subsystem commands Byte Order FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer This command selects the binary data byte order for data transfer It controls whether binary data is transferred in normal or swapped mode This command affects only the byte order for setting and querying trace data for the TRACe DATA and query TRACe DATA commands Normal mode is when the byte sequence begins with the most significant byte MSB first and ends with the least significant byte LSB last in the sequence 1121314 Swapped mode is when the byte sequence begins with the LSB first and ends with the MSB last in the sequence 4131211 Factory Preset and RST Normal Numeric Data format FORMat TRACe DATA ASCii INTeger 32 REAL 32 REAL 64 UINTeger 16 FORMat TRACe DATA This command changes the format of the trace data input and output It affects only the data format for setting and querying trace data for TRACe DATA and query TRACe DATA commands This command specifies the formats used for trace data during data transfer across any remote port For corrected trace data TRACe DATA with parameter trace name gt REAL and ASCii formats will provide trace data in the current amplitude units INTeger format will prov
339. uency Counter Marker Automatic Resolution 000s eee eee 217 Pe Conner Maker 444 Qe eh i oh wen v oh ek Ca e mcd a 217 Fregueney Counter Marker QUOC nos cekes de AERA ERE RI CROP ERI RERO AE T CERES AA 217 IARE PROCU addu Edd Ka RS GE SR Gc HORA GC dca deed 217 Marker Peak Maximum Search 004040050045 RR Rd dens XE AERE 218 Marker Peak Maximum Left Search enses RR EE HR 218 Marker Next Peak Maxim m Search coca cc tex exea QoLR Ed RR dO LER URS pP EC 218 Marker Peak Maximum Right Search oe US 219 Marker Peak i Search dauid qnos bios dod o br gos rcd RC cro 219 219 Rn 3 mP PC PC 220 Delme Peak 1 e En 220 Derme Peak TDESSDORT La chek kee e QOL PAESE bed ded db dob Moa ees 221 dq A EAS 221 Contents Set Center Frequency to the Marker Vale cuu xA AR HORA ARRIERE ER GER 221 Set Reference Level to the Marker Value iiuiisassuusaussackadessedaveaeeeqerks 221 au Span to Me Market 222 Set Start Frequency to the Marker Value ewes en 222 Set Center Frequency Step Size to the Marker Value 222 Set Stop Frequency to the Marker Value qoo Pane i doloe x wor EROR dc 222 Marker OWT conosses senbeseceEeSEReg P EReRPRRRERPSACIAE RR LERRCANSSPerE 222 M
340. uery to determine when the alignment has completed The Second demonstrates using the query form of the CAL ALL command to not only determine when the alignment has been completed but the pass fail status of the align ment process This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens a GPIB session at address 18 Clears the Analyzer CLS Resets the Analyzer RST VISA function sets the time out to infinite Initiate self alignment CAL ALL Query for operation complete OPC Query for results of self alignment CAL ALL Report the results of the self alignment Close the session wf ey vy Ff BRR RK RK RR RK RRR RAK KKK RK RRR IK KKK IKK KK KE KK KEK KE KK KK RK include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA 44018 112 Hewlett Packard E4401B Chapter 3 Programming Examples Performing Internal Self alignment define hpESA IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B definehpEMC_IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 0 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA E4401
341. uestionable Status Integrity Uncalibrated Condition Register are given in the following table 86 Chapter 2 Status Registers Use Status Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 0 0 Oversweep Meas Uncal A lin this position indicates that the analyzer is in a state that could lead to uncalibrated measurements This is typically caused by sweeping too fast for the current combination of span resolution bandwidth and video bandwidth Auto coupling may resolve this problem 1 2 Signal Ident ON A this bit position indicates that amplitude measurements may be in error due to signal identification routines being active Amplitude accuracy is degraded when signal identification is active 2 4 Reserved This bit is not used by the analyzer but is for future use with other Agilent products 3 8 Unused This bit is always set to 0 4 16 Unused This bit is always set to 0 5 32 Unused This bit is always set to 0 6 64 Unused This bit is always set to 0 7 128 Unused This bit is always set to 0 8 256 Unused This bit is always set to 0 9 512 Unused This bit is always set to 0 10 1024 Unused This bit is always set to 0 11 2048 Unused This bit is always set to 0 12 4096 Unused This bit is always set to 0 13 8192 Unused This bit is always set to 0 14 16384 Unused This bit is always set to 0 15 32768 Always Zer
342. ulate size of trace record This will be sum of HeaderBytes NumberBytes the actual data bytes and the n terminator iSize lNumberBytes iHeaderBytes 1 Get trace header data and trace data viPrintf viESA TRAC DATA TRACE1 n viRead viESA ViBuf cResult iSize amp lRetCount Extract the trace data memcpy dTraceArray cResult iHeaderBytes size_t 1NumberBytes Save trace data to an ASCII file fTraceFile fopen C temp ReadTrace32Gpib txt w fprintf fTraceFile ReadTrace32Gpib exe Output nAgilent Technologies 2000 n n fprintf fTraceFile trace data points of the spectrum INumberBytes 4 for long i 0 i lt l1NumberBytes 4 i Chapter 3 123 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using 32 bit Real Format GPIB fprintf fTraceFile NtAmplitude of point d 21 dBm n i 1 dTraceArray i fclose fTraceFile Close the session viClose viESA viClose defaultRM 124 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 RR RI RR I e He He II II IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IOI IO II I IO II IAC k k kk kk k f Reading Trace Data using ASCII Format RS 232 This example is for the E44
343. us Registers to Determine the State of Analyzer Events and Conditions Bit Decimal Description Value 3 32 Command Error A lin this bit position indicates that a command error has occurred Command errors have SCPI error numbers from 199 to 100 6 64 User Request Key Local A lin this bit position indicates that the LOCAL key has been pressed This is true even if the analyzer is in local lockout mode 7 128 Power On 1 in this bit position indicates that the analyzer has been turned off and then on Standard Event Status Event Enable Register The event enable register contained in the standard event status register lets you choose which bits will set the summary bit bit 5 of the status byte register to 1 Send the ESE number command where number is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable For example to enable bit 7 and bit 6 so that whenever either of those bits is set to 1 the standard event status summary bit of the status byte register will also be set to 1 send the ESE 192 128 64 command The ESE command returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits previously enabled with the ESE lt number gt command Standard Event Status Event Enable Register 7 432110 ESE num ESE cb94a STATus OPERation Register The STATus OPERation register is used to determine the specific event that sets bit 7 in the statu
344. ve full 31 bucket smoothing Likewise point 385 will be the last point with full 31 bucket smoothing Under the conditions stated points 2 through 15 will be smoothed as follows Point 2 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 3 Point 3 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 5 Point 4 is derived from averaging buckets 1 through 7 and so forth until point 16 is reached The quantity of buckets used for the smoothing running average increases at the rate of 2 buckets per point from point 1 to point smoothing number 2 331 Language Reference TRACe Subsystem 1 at which time the full number of smoothing points is utilized The same characteristic occurs at the completion of the trace beginning at point 386 when the number of averaging buckets begins to decrease until point 401 is reached By replacing the value of each point in a trace with the average of the values of a number of points centered about that point any rapid variations in noise or signals are smoothed into more gradual variations It thereby performs a function similar to reducing the video bandwidth without the corresponding changes in sweep time as such frequency resolution is decreased Also signal peaks are reduced with large smoothing values and this can cause the amplitude to appear to be less than its actual value Number of Points for Smoothing TRACe MATH SMOoth POINts integer TRACe MATH SMOoth POINts Specifies the number of poin
345. viESA SENS CORR CSET1 STATE ON Mn viPrintf viESA SENS CORR CSET ALL STAT ON Mn Query the analyzer for its amplitude correction factors viQueryf viESA SENS CORR CSET1 DATA s amp cResult Chapter 3 147 Programming Examples Entering Amplitude Correction Data Remove the from the amplitude correction for analyzing data cToken strtok cResult Store the array frequency value into a two dimensional real array aRealArray 1Freq 0 lCount 0 atof cToken Remove the from the amplitude correction for analyzing data cToken strtok NULL Store the array amplitude value into a two dimensional real array aRealArray lAmpltd 1 1Count atof cToken while cToken NULL 1Count if 1Count iNoOfPoints lCount break Remove the from the amplitude correction for analyzing data strtok NULL Store the array frequency value into a two dimensional real array aRealArray 1Freq 1Count atof cToken cToken strtok NULL Store the array amplitude value into a two dimensional real array aRealArray lAmpltd 1Count atof cToken Display the contents of the array for long i 0 i lt l1Count i printf tFrequency of point 1391 MHzWMn i aRealArray 1Freq 1 le6 printf tAmplitude of point 1391 dB n i aRealArray lAmpltd il Close the session viClose v
346. weep When in a measurement this command does the following When ON at the completion of each trigger cycle the trigger system immediately initiates another trigger cycle When OFF the trigger system remains in an idle state until CONTinuous is set to ON oran INITiate IMMediate command is received On receiving the INITiate IMMediate command it will go through a single trigger cycle and then return to the idle state The query returns 1 or 0 into the output buffer 1 is returned when in a continuous measurement state 0 is returned when there is only a single measurement Factory Preset Continuous RST Continuous or On Front Panel Access Sweep Sweep Cont Single Single Chapter 5 249 Language Reference INITiate Subsystem Meas Control Measure Cont Single Take New Data Acquisitions INITiate IMMediate This command initiates a sweep if not in a measurement If in a measurement it triggers the measurement A measurement refers to any function under the MEASURE key Remarks See also the TRG command Usethe TRIGer SEQuence SOURce EXTernal command to select the external trigger The instrument must be in the single measurement mode If INITiate CONTinuous is ON then the command is ignored Use FETCh to transfer a measurement result from memory to the output buffer Refer to individual commands in the MEASure subsystem for more information Front Panel Access Sweep Swe
347. will set bits in the Questionable Power Event register which also sets the Power Summary bit bit 3 in the Questionable Register The variable lt integer gt is the sum of the decimal values of the bits you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 32767 all 1 s Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Power Event Query STATus QUEStionable POWer EVENt This query returns the decimal value of the sum of the bits in the Questionable Power Event register The register requires that the equivalent PTR or NTR filters be set before a condition register bit can set a bit in the event register The data in this register is latched until it is queried Once queried the data is cleared Chapter 5 317 Language Reference STATus QUEStionable Subsection Questionable Power Negative Transition STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable POWer NTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Condition register will set the corresponding bit in the Questionable Power Event register when that bit has a negative transition 1 to 0 The variable integer is the sum of the decimal values of the bits that you want to enable Factory Preset and RST 0 Range integer 0 to 32767 Questionable Power Positive Transition STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition integer STATus QUEStionable POWer PTRansition This command determines which bits in the Questionable Power Con
348. wlett Packard E4401B define hpESA_IDN E4411B Hewlett Packard E4411B define hpEMC_IDN E7401A Hewlett Packard E7401A ViSession defaultRM viESA ViStatus errStatus ViChar cIdBuff 256 0 char cEnter 0 int iResult 20 Set the input port to 50MHz amplitude reference void Route50MHzSignal viQueryf viESA IDN n t amp cIdBuff iResult strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4401B strlen hpESA IDN E4401B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpESA IDN E4411B strlen hpESA IDN E4411B amp amp strncmp cIdBuff hpEMC IDN E7401A strlen hpEMC IDN E7401A if iResult 0 Set the input port to the 50MHz amplitude reference for the models E4411B and E4401B viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn else For the analyzers having frequency limits gt 3GHz prompt the user to connect the amplitude reference output to the input printf Connect AMPTD REF OUT to the INPUT PEINCE 0 224 Press Return to continue n scanf Sc amp cEnter Externally route the 50MHz Signal viPrintf viESA CAL SOUR STAT ON Mn void main 126 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 Program Variable ViStatus viStatus 0 Dimension cResult to 13 bytes per sweep point 8192 sweep points maximum ViChar _VI_FAR cResult 106496 0 FILE fTraceFile static ViChar cToken int iNum 2 0 int iSwpPnts 401 long 1Count 0L
349. x20 amp iStatusByte printf n SRQ message t Error Message Occurred n Return successfully iSrqOccurred zi viReadSTB viESA amp iStatusByte return VI SUCCESS void main Program Variables ViStatus viStatus 0 long lOpc OL int ilntNum 0 long lCount OL Open a GPIB session at address 18 viStatus viOpenDefaultRM amp defaultRM viStatus viOpen defaultRM GPIB0 18 VI NULL VI NULL amp viESA if viStatus printf Could not open a session to GPIB device at address 18 n exit 0 158 Chapter 3 Programming Examples Determine if an Error has Occurred Clear the instrument viClear viESA Reset the instrument viPrintf viESA RST n Clear the status byte of the instrument viPrintf viESA CLS n Display the program heading printf n t t Status register Determine if an Error has Occurred n n Check for the instrument model number and route the 50MHz signal accordingly Route50MHzSignal Put the analyzer in single sweep viPrintf viESA INIT CONT 0 Set the service request mask to assert SRQ when either a measurement is uncalibrated i e Meas Uncal displayed on screen or an error message has occurred viPrintf viESA STAT QUES ENAB 512 n viPrintf viESA STAT QUES INT ENAB 8 n viPrintf viESA ESE 35 n viPrintf viESA SRE 104 n Configure the computer to respon
350. xxB ESA Spectrum Analyzers and E740xA EMC Analyzers This C programming example does the following The SCPI instrument commands used are given as reference Opens an RS 232 session at COM1 COM2 Clears the Analyzer Resets the Analyzer RST Set the input port to the 50 MHz amplitude reference CAL SOUR STAT ON Query for the number of sweep points for firmware revisions A 04 00 and later Default is 401 SENS SWE POIN Set the analyzer to single sweep mode INIT CONT 0 Sets the analyzer center frequency and span to 50 MHz SENS FREQ CENT 50 MHZ SENS FREQ SPAN 50 MHZ Trigger a sweep INIT IMM Check for operation complete OPC Specify dBm Unit UNIT POW DBM Set the analyzer trace data ASCII FORM DATA ASC Trigger a sweep INIT IMM Check for operation complete OPC Query the trace data TRAC DATA TRACE1 Remove the from the ACSII data Save the trace data to an ASCII file Close the session zi i f ay 7 id i a f M ay f n ay d ay ui EJ v ud v n ay BRR RR IR III II IOI IOI III IOI IOI IOI IO I IOI IOI IO IA k k k kk eek f Chapter 3 125 Programming Examples Reading Trace Data Using ASCII Format RS 232 include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt math h gt include lt conio h gt include lt ctype h gt include lt string h gt include visa h define hpESA IDN E4401B He
351. y REFerence COARse setting CALibration FREQuency REFerence COARse Allows coarse adjustment of the internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase of the analyzer CALibration ALL is required after COARse is set Range Integer 0 to 255 Front Panel Access System Alignments Time Base Coarse Fine Adjust the Frequency Reference CALibration FREQuency REFerence FINE setting CALibration FREQuency REFerence FINE Allows fine adjustment of the analyzer internal 10 MHz reference oscillator timebase CALibration ALL is required after FINE is set Range Integer 0 to 255 Front Panel Access System Alignments Time Base Fine Select the Frequency Corrections CALibration FREQuency STATe OFF ON 0 1 CALibration FREQuency STATe Turns on or off the frequency corrections Factory Preset and RST On Front Panel Access System Alignments Freq Correct On Off Align the RF Circuitry CALibration RF CALibration RF Performs an alignment of the RF assembly The query performs the alignment and returns a zero if the alignment is successful Chapter 5 231 NOTE NOTE Language Reference CALibration Subsystem Before executing this command connect a cable between front panel connector AMPTD REF OUT and the INPUT connector for all Agilent EMC analyzers except Agilent model E7401A If the cable is not connected the alignment will fail Front Panel Access System Alignm
352. y Subsystem Store a Limit Line in a File MMEMory STORe LIMit LLINE1 LLINE2 lt file name gt Stores the specified limit line to the specified file in memory Example MMEM STOR LIM LLINE2 C mylimit lim Remarks This command will fail if ile name gt already exists There is no SCPI short form for parameters LLINE1 LLINE2 Front Panel Access File Save Type Limits Store Measurement Results in a File MMEMory STORe RESults lt file name gt Saves the results of the current measurement into a comma separated file Only works when a measurement has been chosen from the MEASURE menu The filename extension is CSV This command will fail if the file lt file name gt already exists Example MMEM STOR RES A ACP CSV Front Panel Access File Save Type Measurement Results Store a Screen Image in a Graphic File MMEMory STORe SCReen file name gt Saves the current instrument screen image as a graphic file to the specified file in memory The file must have a gif or wmf file extension The specified file extension determines which file format the instrument will use to save the image Example MMEM STOR SCR C myscreen gif Remarks This command will fail if the ile name already exists Front Panel Access File Save Type Screen Store an Instrument State in a File MMEMory STORe STATe 1 lt file name gt Saves the instrument state to the file in memory Example MMEM STOR STA
353. ystem The purpose of this function is to perform a spatial video averaging as compared to the temporal version supplied by the video average command SENSe AVERage TYPE VIDeo The functions of TRACe MATH SMOoth trace and SENSe TYPE VIDeo POWer are not interchangeable Each point value is replaced with the average of the values of the selected number of points with half of those points located on each side of any particular point when possible Refer to Figure 5 5 This figure illustrates a 401 point trace with a smoothing number of 31 Think of the trace points as buckets of data To smooth arbitrary point 273 the analyzer averages buckets 258 through 287 and applies that value to point 273 Smoothing With 401 Trace Points and 31 Smoothing Points 123456789 Chapter 5 386 401 cl71a Increasing the number of points increases smoothing at the cost of decreasing resolution The amount of smoothing decreases at the end points Because TRACe MATH SMOoth lt trace gt averages values that occur before and after the data point in time display irregularities can be caused at the start and stop frequencies To avoid possible irregularities signal distortion at the ends of the trace use small values for the smooth parameter Refer to Figure 5 5 for a discussion of this end point smoothing phenomena With 31 smoothing points and a 401 point trace point 16 will be the first point to ha
354. zard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Note calls out special information for the user s attention It provides operational information or additional instructions of which the user should be aware The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation This symbol is used to mark the on position of the power line switch This symbol is used to mark the standby position of the power line switch This symbol indicates that the input power required is AC 0 WARNING WARNING WARNING CAUTION This is a Safety Class 1 Product provided with a protective earth ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall be inserted only in a socket outlet provided with a protected earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the product dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers If this product is not used as specified the protection provided by the equipment could be impaired This product mu
355. zed for fast tuning This command is available for the following models only E7402A E7403A E7404A E7405A Factory Preset and RST On History Added with firmware revision A 08 00 Front Panel Access AUTO COUPLE PhNoise Opt 294 Chapter5 Language Reference SENSe POWer Subsection SENSe POWer Subsection Enable Disable QPD X10 Gain SENSe POWer QPGain STATe ON OFF 1 0 SENSe POWHer QPGain STATe Sets the quasi peak QP gain state On or Off in the quasi peak detector QPD board Factory Preset and RST Off Key Access Det Demod EMI Detector AV QP Gain X1 X10 Input Attenuation SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation rel ampl SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation Set the input attenuator This value is set at its auto value if input attenuation is set to auto Factory Preset and RST 10 dB Range EMC E7401A 0 to 60 dB EMC E7402A 0 to 75 dB EMC E7403A 0 to 75 dB EMC E7404A 0 to 75 dB EMC E7405A 0 to 65 dB Default Unit dB Front Panel Access AMPLITUDE Y Scale Attenuation Auto Man Input Port Attenuator Auto SENSe POWer RF ATTenuation AUTO OFF ON 0 1 SENSe POHer RF ATTenuation AUTO Select the input port attenuator range to be set either automatically or manually On Input attenuation is automatically set as determined by the Reference Level Setting Off Input attenuation is manually set Chapter 5 295 Language Reference SENSe POWer Sub

Agilent Technologies Model A.08.xx Water Dispenser User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents